JP7314649B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, there are those in which the lottery result of a jackpot lottery is notified by a game effect executed on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display. The game performance includes, for example, high-speed fluctuation display performance in which decoration patterns are variably displayed at high speed, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, special ready-to-win performance, etc., and the degree of expectation (big win expectation) for the lottery result to be a big win increases in this order. A special ready-to-win production with a high expectation of a big hit may include a production in which a specific character is the main character (main character), for example, a production in which a specific character (main character) battles an enemy character.

In addition, when the decoration pattern is variably displayed at a high speed, stage production is generally performed behind the decoration pattern (lower layer). This stage performance is a performance executed in a stage having a main theme of a specific place, a specific situation, a specific character, etc., and when the variation game is repeated, a shift is made between a plurality of set stages, and the stage performance corresponding to each stage is executed.

JP 2018-134349 A

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game, and to increase the willingness of the player to play the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The effect executing means (51)
When a predetermined specific effect (for example, a marine special ready-to-win effect) out of the plurality of specific effects is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) is displayed after a predetermined period of execution of the predetermined specific effect (for example, the marine special ready-to-reach effect) (for example, at the start of the variable game to be executed next to the variable game). It is characterized by comprising means for executing the image display means (341).

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4; The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The perspective view of a croon apparatus. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6; A diagram for explaining a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth of the crew device, and a specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display section. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are cross-sectional views along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabet display on the 7-segment display. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller; The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section of the performance information display device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 21; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of a set value changing process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35; FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 shows an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 40; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a control example of the segment display section and an update example of the 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a 7-segment display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; FIG. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending production of a jackpot game. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggesting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display section control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of a sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the pattern display part in a standby state. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64; The figure which shows the lighting/lighting-out example in a lamp display part. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in a sound lamp control device; The figure which shows the screen transition example in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen by the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a hold information storage area set in the RAM of the audio lamp control device; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the decorative design which is variable-displayed and stop-displayed by the design display part. The figure which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern classification selection table used with a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 76(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the production pattern type and the final individual reach type, and FIG. 76(B) is a diagram showing an example of the production pattern type selection table when staying on the character stage. A figure showing an example of marine super reach production (mission production). The figure which shows an example of marine special reach production (battle production). A diagram showing an example of transition to a stay stage in a stage effect in a normal game state. The figure which shows an example of stage production (background production). FIG. 81(A) is a diagram showing an example of a transition to a character stage after a specified out-of-specific reach in a normal stage, and FIG. 81(B) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the stage transition result in the normal stage and the transition destination character stage. The figure which shows an example of the relationship to the transition destination character stage after the SPSP reach out in the character stage. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device; 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of stop symbol combination setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION First to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in the gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrange ball game machine, and a ball game machine.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 . Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the button is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance or the like executed with the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the variable game performance executed in the variable game for clearly indicating the lottery result of the big winning lottery to the player.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the variable game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and is used to store game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and guide the stored game balls to the game ball shooting mechanism 32 in a state of aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect of outputting audio. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31 , the game ball shooting mechanism 32 and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, an out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crew device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313 , first winning port 314 , second winning port 315 , variable winning port 316 , and out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. On the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting entry of game balls are provided corresponding to each of the general prize winning port 313, the first prize winning port 314, the second prize winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by an out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. Also, the variable prize winning port 316 is provided in the right central portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. A game ball that has passed through the through portion 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the crew device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317. FIG. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and the detection of the game ball passing through the through gate 317 is used as a trigger to execute a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to open the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a. Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 .

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 described later, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. As a result, the sound ramp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls by other detection methods.

In addition, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electrical role) 315b for switching presence/absence of restriction on entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 . The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. In the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to restrict the entry of the game ball to the second winning port 315.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . On the game board 31, the opening of the opening/closing door 319 enables the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316.例文帳に追加The open/close door 319 is moved to a position to open the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise waits at a position to close the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. As a result, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling from the left and right of the base 319a. Also, the pair of guides 319 c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319 a to the variable winning opening 316 . A pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. In addition, the variable prize winning port 316 has a through portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The through portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The guideway 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the crew device 37 through the through portion 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entering sensor 316a is provided in the guideway 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the guideway 316c. The ball entering sensor 316 a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 . As a result, the detection result of the entering ball sensor 316 a is input to the main control unit 331 , and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316 .

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entering ball sensors 313a to 316a, a preset number of winning balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is ten, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is three, and the number of prize balls when entering the variable prize opening 316 is ten. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big win, the game machine 10 shifts to a big win game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state including an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or until game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 9) enter the variable winning hole 316. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and is a game state more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state because a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Concretely, in the pattern display part 341, various image performances such as variable display performance of decoration patterns according to the lottery result of the big winning lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry of the ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 and variable game performance executed with the variable display performance are performed. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the variable display performance of decorative patterns in the pattern display part 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns with numbers '1' to '9' in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. In addition, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of decorative patterns, ie, "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, after a preset variable display time elapses from the start of the symbol variable display in the symbol display part 341, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped. More specifically, in the variable display of decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns are changed along a preset variable direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuation of a plurality of decorative patterns is stopped in order. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the decorative design on all lines is stopped, the variable display of the decorative design is finished.

When the variable display of the ornamental symbols in the symbol display portion 341 is completed, the symbol display portion 341 displays a state in which the ornamental symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decoration pattern indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``16R probability variable jackpot'' or ``5R normal jackpot'', a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are arranged on the effective line is displayed to clearly indicate the jackpot. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', a state in which pattern combinations such as ``777'' set as a pattern combination showing 16R probability variable big win among the decorative patterns are arranged in the effective line is displayed, or a state in which the same decorative pattern combinations other than ``777'' are arranged in the effective line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', a state in which pattern combinations such as ``333'', which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating 5R probability variable big win, among the decoration patterns are arranged in the effective line is displayed, or a state in which the same decorative pattern combinations other than the pattern combinations indicating 16R probability variable big win or 5R probability variable big win such as ``777'' and ``333'' are lined up in the effective line is displayed. When the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', a state is displayed in which combinations of the same decoration patterns other than the pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot such as ``222'' and ``444'', which are set in advance as the pattern combination indicating the normal jackpot among the decoration patterns, are arranged on the effective line. Also, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variable display of decorative symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the decoration pattern combination showing the 16R probability variable big win is arranged on the effective line is displayed, a suggestive performance suggesting 5R probability variable big win or 5R normal big win is executed as the variable game performance. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', when a state in which big winning pattern combinations other than the combination of decorative patterns showing probability variable big winning are arranged on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive performance suggesting 5R normal big winning is executed as variable game performance. In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4, the crew device 37 distributes the game balls entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball 378 or a special out ball 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the cloon device 37 and the game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the cloon device 37, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371 . The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that slopes downward to the left and is provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball mouth 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 . A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38 . The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

It should be noted that the first guide member 375 can also have a function of retaining the game ball 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 . By the way, in the present embodiment, numbers (specific information) corresponding to non-set values, which are game set values other than set values, which are game set values set in the gaming machine 10, are presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is seven (excluding the dot points DP), one non-set value can be reliably specified with seven pieces of information. In addition, since the game set values are in six stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, so all the non-set values can be specified with 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (the specified number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained during a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention portion 38 to retain the game balls 99 in a predetermined number or more. In this case, by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of accumulating the game balls 99, the number of game balls 99 that is difficult to be retained only by the game ball retaining portion 38 can be retained using the first guide member 375.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to allow game balls 99 of a prescribed number or more to remain in a specified period, and information necessary to specify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain the game balls 99 in a prescribed number or more not only by giving the game ball retention part 38 but also in the first guide member 375 a function to retain the game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various members, the game balls 99 in a prescribed number or more can be retained by using the special out ball passage 374.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values is presented.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained during a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number to the specified number). In this case, for example, when the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of balls 99 entering the special out ball 373 is presented, information for specifying all non-set values in one specific period may be presented. In addition, when the number of game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball 373, for example, the number of information corresponding to the number of winnings in the lottery is presented, the information of the expected number corresponding to the probability of winning the lottery is presented, and the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the specified number, so there is a possibility that all the information necessary to specify all the non-set values will not be presented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the probability of big win is low), it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely ending the game in the game machine 10 during the game.

As means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when the limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (by causing ball clogging), thereby reducing the special out ball passage 37. It is conceivable to limit the entry of the game ball 99 to 4. According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained for a specific period by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring complicated configuration and control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38 . The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317 . Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is treated as an out ball at the time when it is not expected to enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, at the time when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (at the time when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378 is provided in the low bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 entering through the normal out ball 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376 . This second guide member 377 gathers the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31 in the same way as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318 . The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out-balls.

The game ball 99 that is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to the croon device 37 through the guide path 316c. The game ball 99 guided to the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372 . As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 37 . Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 usually enter an out ball opening 378 by, for example, reducing the kinetic energy and colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 and other game balls 99. A game ball 99 entering the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 change their moving direction due to collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or other game balls, and enter the special out ball 373 . A game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is released toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375 .

Here, the ball entry probability that the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enters the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 per round game for 10R is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of entering a ball or the expected number of entering a ball within such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the set value early, while at the same time making it possible to specify the set value realistically. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being terminated in the game machine 10 when the set value is specified at an early stage such as when the set value is low, and to prevent the game from being terminated due to boredom due to the inability to specify the set value.

In this embodiment, the special out ball 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. Therefore, the special out ball 373 is markedly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball 378. However, in place of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 by other means. It is also possible to make it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibition means for inhibiting entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball 373 . As the obstructing means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall surrounding the special out ball 373 that obstructs the entry of the ball into the special out ball 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out ball 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by blowing air around the special out ball 373 can be considered.

Further, an opening/closing portion for opening/closing the special out ball 373 may be provided, and the opening/closing portion may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball 373 . In this case, the special out ball 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball 378 , and the normal out ball 378 may be formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball 373 .

Also, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crew device 37, and other means may be used. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, the normal out ball 378 and the special out ball 373 may be distributed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention section 38 receives a game ball 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. Then, after the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 before the predetermined period has elapsed. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention portion, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth of the crew device, and a specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display portion.

In the following description, referring to FIG. 9, the specific period is defined as the period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the predetermined period is defined as the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and the "specified period" is defined as the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during the specific period. 39, but the ``specific period'' is not limited to the period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, and the ``predetermined period'' is not limited to the period in which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is cumulatively counted. That is, the "specified period", "predetermined period" and "prescribed period" include at least the period described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B) , the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 is from the start of the big win game (opening) to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the big win game (start of the ending), and the specific period is set for each big win game started in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends (when the ending starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a variable probability big win is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a variable probability big win and a series of big wins is started), a period from the start of each big win game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game is set as a specific period for all the big win games executed until the continuous big win by the normal big win game when the normal jackpot is won in the high probability mode. That is, in the jackpot series, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games executed during the jackpot series.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, the number corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period of one jackpot game, which will be described later. That is, the specified period is set as a period for displaying a number indicating a game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) defining the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the game machine 10 will be a big hit based on the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the specific period.

Then, when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one big win game is 7 or more and less than 14, the number specifying the game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the probability that the lottery result in the big win lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a big win is set according to the display order set in the display order setting process of FIG. One is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a certain period of time. In addition, at the ending (specified period) after the specified period of the jackpot game has elapsed, two numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 in the specified period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, and when the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during a specified period of one big win game is less than 7, not even one number specifying a plurality of non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the ending (specified period) after the specified period of the big win game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which will be described later, based on the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period every time a jackpot game is executed, and the setting values can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the 5 non-set values. For example, by displaying the number 1 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 1 is a non-set value, by displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 2 is a non-set value, by displaying the number 3 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 3 is a non-set value, and by displaying the number 4 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 4 is a non-set value. By displaying the number 5 on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 5 is a non-set value, and by displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 6 is a non-set value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display 39, it can be identified that the non-set values are the game set values 2 to 6, so that the set value can be grasped as the game set value 1. Similarly, by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 2. By displaying five numbers 1, 2, 4 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 3. By displaying five numbers 1 to 3, 5, 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 4. , 6 are displayed, it can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 5, and five numbers 1 to 5 are displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, so that the set value can be grasped as the game set value 6.例文帳に追加

Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When the segment B which is the second object to be controlled is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6". Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment E, which is the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control object, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become the object of control, the control for displaying the number of the next priority is not started unless all the segments A to G become the object of control. As a result, in order to specify all non-set values, it is necessary to satisfy more specific conditions than when the control for displaying the next priority number is started at the stage where the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty until all the non-set values are identified, and thus the difficulty of recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short playing time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the game player from grasping the set value in a short period of time, so that the game time in the game machine 10 can be prevented from being reduced, and the operating rate of the game machine 10 can be suppressed from being lowered.

In addition, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number may be started. For example, when the priority of the numbers is "1"→"2"→"3"→ . By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the next number to be displayed is not started until after all the segments A to G are controlled. Therefore, even when the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 before all the segments A to G become control objects, the information for specifying the numbers already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until the next display of the numbers to be displayed starts. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and there is concern that the player's interest in the game may decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 become the control target, if the control for displaying the next priority number is started, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value will not become the control target after one non-set value can be specified. This prevents the loss of interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is the point of time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the point of time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is terminated (timing when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single-shot jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention portion 38 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, when a variable probability big win is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a variable probability big win and a series of big wins is started), the predetermined period is a period from the start of the variable probability big win game for the first win that triggers the start of the consecutive big wins to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game that triggers the end of the consecutive big wins. That is, in the case of a series of jackpots, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and a plurality of times are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when the jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game, or the game is not finished in the middle of the jackpot series. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 for each jackpot game, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the specific period ends. A predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering a special out ball opening 373 of a crew device 37 is set from the start of a big win game for a big win in a low probability mode to the end of an open/close execution mode for a big win game for a normal big win, thereby preventing the player from finishing the game before the specified period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball holding section 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37), thereby displaying information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values) that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed, and opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot. In the ending after the elapse of, information (all or part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) that can identify or guess the non-set value corresponding to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period is displayed. As a result, even when a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values other than the set values can be specified or estimated progresses the game, the game is prevented from ending before the timing at which the non-set values can be specified or estimated. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values can be specified or estimated can specify or estimate the non-set values, and can specify the set values by specifying all the non-set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values can be specified or guessed.

Further, the specific period is set for each jackpot game started in the predetermined period, so that in the consecutive jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the final jackpot game of the jackpot consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the continuous jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in the single hit, and the predetermined period increases as the number of times the jackpot game is executed increases. As a result, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is more likely to increase in the consecutive big win than in the single-shot winning, and the possibility of increasing the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 increases as the number of times of the consecutive big win increases. As a result, the player not only obtains a larger expected value of the game value to be acquired as the number of times of the jackpot wins increases, but also obtains a large amount of information for specifying or estimating the non-set value, and obtains the benefit of facilitating estimation or specification of the non-set value and the set value.

The starting time of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention part 38 may be set during the jackpot game, not only when the jackpot game is started, but also when the opening/closing execution mode is started (the opening of the first hit is finished). Moreover, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the open/close execution mode for one jackpot game. Thus, based on the number of specific conditions established when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 316 in the open/close execution mode (based on the number of the game balls 99 passing through the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37), information for specifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, that is, after the lapse of a specific period, the user can enjoy the game by paying attention to the contents displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 and specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the display contents.

Further, the starting time of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is not limited to the time when the big winning game for the first winning (big winning in the low probability mode) is started, but may be set to the big winning game. Preferably, the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in the low probability mode), for example, the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in the low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first win is finished). Thus, by setting the starting time of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single-shot jackpot or a consecutive big win, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying a non-set value for one first win is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, it is conceivable to set the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. Also, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time-saving mode shifted after the normal jackpot ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the description is based on the premise of a loop variable machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one and two types of mixing machines, setting a predetermined period according to the aspect It is also conceivable. For example, in the V-ST machine, if there is no V prize at the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as the normal jackpot of the loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize at the first hit (variable probability jackpot), the start of the first jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode is the start of the predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode with no V win or the end of the specified number of jackpot lotteries in the high probability mode is the end of the predetermined period.

Also, the predetermined period may be set to a period during which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating the non-set value is displayed, and the period of staying in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period of staying in the time saving mode (period from the end of the normal jackpot to the normal game state), the period of staying in the low probability mode (from the end of the normal jackpot to the next jackpot game) period until the technique is started), the period until a predetermined number of jackpot lotteries are received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the normal winning lottery is received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Moreover, the predetermined period may be set for each variation game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the entire period of one variation game may be the predetermined period, or a partial period of one variation game may be the predetermined period. When a partial period of one variable game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period includes a period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the decorative patterns reach the ready-to-win state, a period from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns to the start of development performance such as special ready-to-win performance, a period from the ready-to-reach state to the start of the development performance, a period from the ready-to-reach state to the end of the development performance, and a period during which the development performance is executed.

By setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed in this way, it is possible to specify or estimate the non-set value and recognize or estimate the set value even in a period other than the period in which the big win game is executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

Then, when the predetermined period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the cloon device 37 is a position (for example, the left area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) to distribute the game ball 99 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 when the game ball 99 hit to the left area of the game board 31 is hit left. ) can also be considered. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special hit (right hit that hits the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, it is possible to enjoy specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) while progressing the game as usual without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.例文帳に追加

Also, depending on the type of specific condition, it is conceivable to set the start time of the predetermined period when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

As a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, instead of entering the special out ball 373, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball 373.

Also, the game balls 99 entering the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, etc. or passing through the through gate 317 are guided to a sorting means such as a crew device 37, and the game balls 99 sorted by the sorting means enter the special out ball hole 373 as a specific condition. In this case as well, it is possible to enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing a special launch.

Also, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that can occur in the progress of the game. The particular event in this case may be either favorable or unfavorable to the player. If the specific event is advantageous to the player, the player can obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) in addition to the privilege obtained by the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player can obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), winning a variable or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one) or more (running a variable or normal jackpot game a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), reaching a number of consecutive jackpots exceeding a predetermined number of times (winning a variable probability jackpot a predetermined number of times or more in a row until a normal jackpot is won), It is conceivable that the number of jackpot lotteries until winning the jackpot reaches a predetermined number or more, or that the number of game balls 99 exceeding the upper limit number (over prize winning) occurs in the round game in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game.

Further, the specific event may be execution of a specific effect preset in a variation game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, for example, it may be set to any of non-reach effect and ready-to-win effect, and may be set to any of opening effect, round game effect and ending effect. Typically, the specific performance includes a premium performance in which a big win or a variable probability big win is determined among variable game performances, and a performance that clearly states that a holding series is executed after the end of the big win game in the big win game (at the start of the big win game, at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the end of the big win game, the lottery result is a big win in the holding at a specific time of the jackpot game). Furthermore, as a specific event, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols in the pattern display section 341 are displayed in a specific combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display). For example, in the pattern display part 341, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at ``777'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach pattern like ``767'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific non-reach-out position (discrete pattern) like ``367'', etc., a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) can be considered that clearly indicates that a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a ready-reach effect. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development performance is to be executed, it is conceivable that the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7", and that the middle pattern, such as "development", is temporarily stopped and displayed to clarify that the development performance is to be executed. The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific combination of specific events.

Also, the specific condition may be established in relation to the set value. That is, a set value may be included in a specific condition, and for example, a specific condition may be established when a specific event occurs in a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is defined by the set value, as will be described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a different order depending on the type of specific condition. Thus, the display order can be set for each set value based on, for example, whether the probability of winning a big win is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of numbers indicating a plurality of non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the prescribed period for displaying the specific information indicating the non-set value or part thereof (special information) when the specific condition is satisfied is not limited to the case of being set for each ending of the jackpot game, but may be other timing, and may be set according to the relationship with the predetermined period, the relationship with the specific period, or the relationship with the specific condition. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game typically set to the end of the given period after the lapse of the given period as described in the second embodiment described later, or other than the jackpot game, for example, after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when a predetermined period is set as the execution period of the variable game, the specified period includes, for example, the start of variation of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the timing to start the development performance such as the super ready-to-win performance and the special ready-to-win performance, and the execution of the development performance. In other words, it is conceivable to set the specified period to the period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value along with the result of the big winning lottery. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed in the pattern display section 341 by displaying the variation of decorative patterns, the pattern display section 341 can be made to display the specific information at the same time. As a result, the player's interest in the variable game can be enhanced by displaying the specific information.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line in FIG. 8, FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 section line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position, and FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 section line in FIG. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 for a specific period, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The staying lane 381 receives the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The stay lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381, and it is possible to visually recognize the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently with resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 . Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The display of the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be, for example, the number of lamps lit up, image display in the symbol display section 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 continues to the left end of the staying lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 to a predetermined position, for example, a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

A special out-ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382 . This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves through the discharge lane 382 . That is, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and by monitoring the output from the special out ball sensor 384 by the MPU 41, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has moved in the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the setting value (see command determination processing in FIG. 37 and setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Also, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio ramp control device 5 . In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the sound lamp controller 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384 .

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is vertically moved between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 by the stopper portion 383 being at the upper limit position (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 can be discharged through the discharge lane 382 by the stopper portion 383 being in the lower limit position (see FIG. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and for discharging the game balls 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, but may be other means such as a stopper portion that can move back and forth, a stopper portion that can rotate between a standing state and a prone state, and the like. Alternatively, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, the game ball 99 may be retained by waiting in the stay lane 381 at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, and the game ball 99 may be transferred to the discharge lane 382 by moving the stay lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382.例文帳に追加In addition, the game board 31 may be provided with an opening for discharging the game balls 99 to the back side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be vertically moved between a position at which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position at which the game balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the back side of the game board 31. Also, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, it is conceivable that the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31.例文帳に追加

Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display portion 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display portion, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display portion.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display section 39 consists of 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and can display at least numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B) and at least alphabets A to F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values (specific numerical information)) other than the game set values (set values (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 from a plurality (six) of game set values (numeric information) corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win. is displayed numerically by lighting or extinguishing each of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1; when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2; , C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the number 5 is displayed by lighting the segments A, C, D, F and G, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the number 6 is displayed by lighting the segments A, C to G. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is illuminated at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

Also, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set values are changed (see FIGS. 35 and 36). Also, as will be described later, the control order of turning on or off the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as will be described later, segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, and the 7-segment display unit 39 displays a number or a part of the number. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 does not indicate game set values, but indicates part of specific information indicating non-set values, and corresponds to special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using part of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. In this way, not only the number indicating the non-set value but also part of the number (special information) is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, so that the player can not only specify the non-set value when the number is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, but also guess the non-set value based on part of the number displayed on the 7-segment display part 39. Therefore, even if the numbers are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the non-set value can be guessed based on a part of the numbers and enjoyed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In the 7-segment display section 39, whether or not each of the segments A to G is to be controlled may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. If it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it becomes easier to guess the set values than when it is not indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of the segments A to G is fixed, it is not clearly stated that the segments A to G are controlled objects, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to guess the set values. When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, for example, by flashing the segment to be controlled, it is possible to indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled, and to indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting the segment in a different color from the lighting of the segment to be controlled.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, the information for specifying the non-set value may be displayed in alphabetical characters corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the letter A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the alphabet C is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the alphabet D is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the alphabet E is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the alphabet F is displayed. (See FIG. 11(C)).

The main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first reserved number display section 364, and a second reserved number display section 365, which are arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31.

A normal pattern display part 361 includes an LED pair as a normal pattern (normal pattern), and displays the lottery result of the normal pattern winning lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessary 315b executed with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger, by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED pair. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes a pair of LEDs (variably displays a normal pattern) with the winning of a through gate 317 as a trigger, and lights or extinguishes each LED after the lapse of the variable display time to display the result of the lottery per normal pattern.

The first special symbol display part 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game executed upon winning a prize in the first winning port 314 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes 7 segments of a 7-segment display device (variably displays the first special pattern) with the winning of a prize in a first prize winning port 314 as a trigger, and displays the result of the big winning lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the lapse of the variable display time.

The second special symbol display part 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game to be executed upon winning a prize in the second prize-winning port 315 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments in the 7-segment display device. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes 7 segments of a 7-segment display device (variably displays the second special pattern) with the winning of a prize to a second prize winning port 315 as a trigger, and displays the result of the big win lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the lapse of the variable display time.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special figure of the variable display caused by the winning of the first winning hole 314 by the number of lighting of the four LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special figure of the variable display caused by the winning to the second winning opening 315 by the number of lighting of the four LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 12 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether a ball enters the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316, and whether the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a special out ball detection command, and a set value change command to the sound lamp control device 5.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is set at step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N or hold number M. It is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in the pending storage area 412b described later when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first pending command setting process in FIG. 22 described later).

The shift command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted when the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition processing in the main processing of FIG. 23 to be described later when shifting to the jackpot game state. Also, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the start of the jackpot game to the voice lamp control device 5, the voice lamp controller 5 can grasp not only the start of the jackpot game but also the start of the opening by receiving the jackpot game start command. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the sound lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is, and is set in jackpot game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the round game start command ends the opening and the opening/closing execution mode starts, but apart from the round game start command, the opening end command may be set at the end of the opening, or the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The round game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in jackpot game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 to be described later. The sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control contents of the 7-segment display section 39 .

The set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the set value has been changed and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes main timer interrupt processing described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the control bodies in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electrician reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal win random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning port 315 is to be put in the electric role open state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used for initial value setting of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as win/fail information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided individually corresponding to each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is stored in either the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for 19 in the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the win/fail information is stored in the vacant areas in order of priority among the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the winning/failure information is stored in the vacant areas in order of priority among the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 are used.

It is also possible to provide a holding area with a maximum holding number of 8 in common to the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 as another embodiment, and even in this case, it is possible to hold up to eight pieces of win/fail information as a winning history. The storage processing of the win/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a storage area used for moving the winning/failure information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the pattern variation display on the main display portion 36 and the pattern display portion 341 is started. Specifically, the right/wrong information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and when the right/wrong information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the number of reservations storage area NAB is 0, the right/wrong information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

If the difference between the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA and the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the second pending storage area REB is 2 or more, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the pending area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success/failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, the win/fail information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the win/fail information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, the win/fail information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the win/fail information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number used to win the jackpot is set in two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is the probability variable gaming state, by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 411 . Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the example shown in FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B), as the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, there are provided a plurality of success/failure tables in which the probability that the lottery result in the big win lottery results in a big win (jackpot probability) differs according to the game setting value. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table respectively include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of game set value 6, game set value 5, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the lottery result in the big lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player.

At the game set value 1, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 821 (0 to 820) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about 1/79.9 (820/65536), which is about four times that in the low-probability mode.

At the game set value 2, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 845 (0 to 844) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/77.6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 869 (0 to 868) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65536), which is about four times that in the low-probability mode.

At the game set value 4, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 893 (0 to 892) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is approximately four times that in the low-probability mode, which is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65536).

At the game set value 5, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 917 (0 to 916) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71.5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery results in a big win is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 941 (0 to 940) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69.6 (941/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than those random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the lottery result of the big winning lottery between the same game set values has a common random number that makes a big win, but it is conceivable that the random numbers that make a big win are not common. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game set values in multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is five from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be the 5R normal jackpot is five from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5, 0 to 4, the number of the fourth random number for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10, 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5, 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b), compared to the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode with low opening probability of the electric accessory 315b), the expected value of the game ball obtained when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a separate distribution table is set for each of the first winning port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the pattern game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the big winning lottery is ``5R probability variable big winning'', ``16R probability variable big winning'', ``5R normal big winning'' or ``loss'' based on the values of the big winning random number counter C1 and the big winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) is continued until the player is notified of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times, or terminated when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win before the lapse of the predetermined number of times.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable probability machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big win, a jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) is executed in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). , the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the variable game as another embodiment. It should be noted that, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, 5R variable probability jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three kinds of outlier types is set according to the outlier type table stored in the outlier type table storage area in the ROM 411, i.e., the front-to-rear out-of-reach reach in which the final stop pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win is shifted by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern and stops, the reach other than the front-to-rear out-of-reach in which the final stop pattern stops at a place other than the ready-to-win pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the complete loss in which the ready-to-win does not occur.

Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the random number value that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that becomes the reach other than the front and rear deviation is 9 to 38, and the random number value that becomes complete deviation is 39 to 238. In addition, the MPU 41 judges reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win state is a variable state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns indicating that a big win is likely to occur is shown during the period from the start of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display part 341 to the stop display of the patterns. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the pattern display part 341, a story performance process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, a player participation type operation performance process in which the player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the performance, etc. are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. Thus, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice ramp control device 5 determines rough variation game performance types such as high-speed variation performance (basic performance, non-reach performance), normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and loss fluctuation table, fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU 41 refers to a normal big winning variation table when the lottery result of the big winning lottery is ``5R normal big winning'', to a probability variable big winning variation table when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big winning'' or ``16R probability variable big winning'', and to a loss variation table when the lottery result is ``losing'' to specify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the variation pattern '01' is selected, the normal ready-to-win performance pattern having a variation display time of 30 s is determined as the variation type (performance pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the normal ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win performance pattern with a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the super ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the super reach production. Further, when the variation pattern '03' is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special ready-to-win performance pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the loss variation table, the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined for each stop type at the time of failure (front-rear failure reach, reach other than front-rear failure, complete failure) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or non-rear-end out-of-reach reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加Further, when the variation pattern '05' is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern '04', the variation display of the failure pattern is executed in which the variation display is deactivated and stopped at the pattern without an advance notice performance of displaying a character, a message, or the like. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern in which the variation display is deviated and stopped at the pattern is executed with an advance notice performance of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Further, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as an advance notice effect.

Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of kinds of normal ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal ready-to-win performances to be executed in the normal ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '01', and one of the normal ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win performances to be executed in the super ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '02', and one of the super ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed. The super ready-to-win performance is a ready-to-win performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win performance, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal ready-to-win performance and the probability (expectation) of winning the big win is lower than the special ready-to-win performance.

Further, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win performances to be executed in the special ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '03', and one of the special ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

The production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern may include a player-participation type operation production such as an operation production in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, for example, a single operation production in which a single operation is reflected in the production, a repeated operation production in which the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, and a long-press operation production in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 and the symbol display part 341 of the main display part 36, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the big winning lottery is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``A01'' to ``A03'' in which ``A'' indicating 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``B01'' to ``B03'' with ``B'' indicating 5R probability variable big win in front of the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. Further, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``C01'' to ``C03'' with ``C'' indicating 16R probability variable big win in front of the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating the failure in front of the variation patterns "01" to "05". Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and based on the variation pattern and the lottery result, determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the performance type displayed on the pattern display part 341. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display part 341 to execute the variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on, blinks or extinguishes the illumination part 27.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d contains, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out to general winning opening", "number of balls paid out to first winning opening", "number of discharged balls to second winning opening", "variable number of paid out balls to winning opening", "set value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "character ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and " The number of consecutive failures" is stored. Among these pieces of game information, "set value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "player ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number of times" correspond to game information (performance information) relating to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout ball number" is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning to the general winning hole 313 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. .

The "first winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning hole 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning hole" is a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. update to.

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). The number of balls to be paid out to the second winning port 315 is obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out for this winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. value.

The “variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout ball number" is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning when setting the winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. do.

The "set value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (determination of success/failure). In other words, the "set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, six levels of setting values (six types of low-probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14(A)) and high-probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 14(B))) are prepared. The "set value" is updated in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The 'base information' is information on the 'base' which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this 'base' is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the 'general winning port payout ball count' and the 'first winning port payout ball count' to the 'out ball count' in the normal game state. If the "base" is represented by a mathematical formula, it is "base" = 100 x ("number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening" + "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening") / "number of out balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the ``base'' when the latest number of out balls reaches 60,000 is stored as the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the ``base'' when the previous number of out-balls reaches 60,000 is stored as the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time, as ``base information'' in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.例文帳に追加Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM412. Also, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out to the general winning opening", the "number of balls paid out to the first winning opening" and the "number of out balls" for the base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out to the general winning opening", the "number of balls paid out to the first winning opening" and the "number of out balls".

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000-ball base B1", and "previous 60,000-ball base B2", and the past two 60,000-ball bases are recorded as a history, but the past three or more 60,000-ball bases may be recorded as a history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

The "continuous role ratio information" is information on the "continuous role ratio", which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning outlets to the total number of paid out balls due to winnings in all the winning outlets (general winning outlet 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). If the "continuous role ratio" is represented by a formula, it is "continuous role ratio"=100*"variable number of payout balls"/"total number of payout balls". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous role ratio information" may be a continuous role ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "character ratio information" is information related to the "character ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of balls paid out from the second winning opening and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening to the total number of paid out balls due to the winning of all the winning openings (the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316). Expressing the "role product ratio" as a mathematical formula, "role product ratio"=100×("number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening"+"number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" may be a role ratio for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, and a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The 'cumulative jackpot lottery number' is the number of times the jackpot lottery has been performed in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) from the start of the game machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is also the cumulative variation display count in which the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 is executed with the winning of the first winning port 314 in the normal game state as a trigger. The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of jackpot lotteries (the number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display part of the main display part 36 is executed) triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the ``unit jackpot lottery number'' is the number of variable display times of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display part 362 with an average of 1000 yen (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen in the game hall. The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot lotteries" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, or for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was started before the opening of the game hall. The "number of big hits" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the big win game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. Also, the “number of times of big wins” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The ``number of consecutive losses'' is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively lost in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. The "number of consecutive failures" is incremented by 1 if the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 is a loss, and is cleared to 0 times if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, when the pattern variation display on the main display unit 36 is started at step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive losses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “set values” stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. FIG. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM 47. FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, which are called 4-digit 7-segment displays. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in a game component other than the main control unit 331. Also, it is conceivable to display the “base information” using the first special symbol display portion 362 and/or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 .

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, the dot is lit and displayed as "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8." When the alphabet "D" is displayed, the dot is lit and displayed as "0." Also, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light up the dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

Of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the performance display monitor 43 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed in abbreviations, and the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation of the current base BL "BL" is displayed as "8." and "L" in the left two seven-segment displays 431 and 432, which are the identification segments, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" in the two right seven-segment displays 433 and 434, which are the ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3" and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing it, and is provided at a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the performance display monitor 43 is enabled to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 18A is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000-ball base B1 → the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 → the current base BL are looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18(C) indicates that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time, and a program for sequentially displaying the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time on the performance display monitor 43 at regular intervals are stored in the ROM 47 provided in the main control unit 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous role product ratio information" or "accessory ratio information" in place of or in addition to the "base information".

Moreover, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 is configured by a 7-segment display to display the above-described setting values for selecting the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 may be used to display the setting values.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing, and allows setting values to be changed by rotating when the 7-segment display is powered on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the setting value display unit 45 is in the off state and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the setting value display unit 45 displays a number. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is on, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display section 45 is in the lighting state and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. In the illustrated example, the setting value display portion 45 is rotated clockwise to increase the number displayed on the setting value display portion 45, and the setting value display portion 45 is rotated to the left to decrease the number displayed on the setting value display portion 45. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the setting value. Therefore, when the power of the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation part 46 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display part 45, the number displayed immediately before the power is turned off is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 can perform a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) or the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) selected in accordance with the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of turning off the set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46 . For example, a method of determining the setting value by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), a method of turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly, and a method of changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key, and then removing the key. Good.

Here, the performance information display device 4A having the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. FIG. Also, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . Therefore, the set value display part 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a visible state and a non-visible state from the outside of the game machine 10 (front side of the front frame 11). That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display part 45 cannot be visually recognized, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display part 45 can be visually recognized. Thus, when a player executes a game on the game machine 10, the set value display part 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened, so that the player is prevented from grasping the set value by the number displayed on the set value display part 45.例文帳に追加When the set value display section 45 is in the lit state, the set value change operation section 46 is pressed to turn off the set value display section 45 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display part 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, even if the set value display part 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to jamming of balls in the game machine 10 or the like, the set value can be prevented from being grasped by the player.

On the other hand, the set value display section 45 is turned on by pressing the set value change operation section 46 when it is in the off state, and the number corresponding to the set value is hidden. Therefore, by opening the game board 31 from the front frame 11 and performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation unit 46 outside the business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 is turned on so that the set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value change operation unit 46.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the secrecy of the setting value during the business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and executes symbol variation display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 based on control signals input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The sound lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4, the command (control signal) is input to the display control device 6, and the display of the pattern display unit 341 is controlled. In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display section 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, the 7-segment display portion 39, etc. based on the command input from the main control device 4. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, a state in which the game ball (special out ball) entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. Each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51 . Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 is operated, and based on the detection result, it is possible to control the image game performance executed by the pattern display part 341, the voice output performance that the sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp performance by the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (decorative symbol stop pattern combination (see FIG. 38A), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38B)) and production pattern type (see FIGS. 39A to 37C) based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37). ), the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 , and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to control programs, a ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable patterns such as ornamental patterns used in pattern variable display of a pattern display part 341, advance notice performance images, ready-to-win performance images, jackpot performance images, and loss performance images. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are put out, and a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be put out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving section 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the game machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 can pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount stored in the recording medium such as the card inserted in the ball lending device 100 and lend them to the player according to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby supplying the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the shooting rail 321. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to shoot the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31 . At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 so that the intensity of shooting the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 increases as the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 increases.

Further, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stopping switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stopping switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 or detects that the ball stopping switch 21b is operated by the player, the shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . In addition, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it is determined that the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, main timer interrupt processing that is periodically started, and NMI interrupt processing that is executed when a power failure occurs. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. In the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. Furthermore, when the special out-ball sensor 384 detects a special out-ball sensor 384 , the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command and stores this special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start-up winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the shooting control process is a process for validating the shooting of game balls on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. The shooting control process is a process of invalidating the shooting of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through-gate processing in which a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning opening 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electricity holding area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high-frequency support mode is not set, the MPU 41 judges a normal hit when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0-29, and judges a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30-249. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the win is normal when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and judges that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249 as a loss. Then, when the MPU 41 determines in the through gate process that the win is normal, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314. FIG. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. Store in the first empty reservation area of the fourth reservation area REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first suspension acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes the first suspension command setting process of setting the first suspension command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it determines that there is no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No), the starting winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. Store in the first empty reservation area of the fourth reservation area REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the propriety information before the validity information for the second suspension acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes the second pending command setting process of setting the second pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second pending command setting process, the "first pending command" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. 22 can be replaced with the "second pending command", and the "number of pending commands N" can be read as the "number of pending commands M".

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), the variation pattern and the number of pending N, etc. Information is included. The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-probability mode is set based on a high-probability mode flag that is set to ON when transitioning to the high-probability mode in a game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the high-probability mode to another game state such as a jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table or the low-probability mode validity table stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27 described later. Appropriateness determination may be performed by selecting the mode appropriateness table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the success/failure information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the counter value of the big hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the success/failure information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is read. Incidentally, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which the success/failure information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21 can be determined by the value of the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first pending command includes the pending number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first pending command refers to the pending number N included in the first pending command. By referring to this, it is possible to recognize which of the first pending area REA1 to the fourth pending area REA4 the first pending command corresponds to the correctness information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

The first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as regular processes with, for example, 4 msec cycles, and the counter update processes of steps S1310 to S1312 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes external output processing for transmitting output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first reserve command, a second reserve command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery frequency update command are set in a RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls to be paid out from the general winning port or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning when winning occurs in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Further, in the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 updates the number of put-out balls for the variable winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of put-out balls for the current winning when winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316.例文帳に追加

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command required for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and variation display time of the jackpot lottery in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 so as to execute the round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened by the number corresponding to the result (jackpot type) of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition processing, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to a jackpot game state in which an opening/closing execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variation game for reporting the lottery result is finished. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery which triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, the MPU 41 shifts to the variable probability game state after the end of the big win game when the lottery result of the big win lottery is 5R probability variable big win or 16R probability variable big win, and shifts to the time saving game state after the big win game ends when the lottery result of the big win lottery is 5R normal big win. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

Further, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "jackpot count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes set value change processing. In this set value change process, a process of controlling display or non-display of the set value or change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. FIG. Details of the set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the set value change process is executed in the main process, but it is conceivable that it is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process until the game ball is started to be launched. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the setting value cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time, so that the setting value can be prevented from being changed during the business hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S<b>1309 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, i.e., during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process arrives (step S1310: Yes), until it determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
At step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variation game control process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), it ends the variable game control process, and if it is not in the jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the big winning game is executed is determined based on a big winning game flag which is set to ON when shifting to the big winning game state and set to OFF when shifting from the big winning game state to another game state in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, for example.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and when it is determined that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404, and when it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display flag to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 stores the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the reservation storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB It determines whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform variation display based on the success/failure information, and terminates the variation game control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the right/fail information from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 proceeds when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 proceeds when both or one of the number of reservations M and N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 23). As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined, for example, based on whether or not the high probability mode flag which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23 is set to ON. If the game state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), i.e., if the game state is the low-probability mode, shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the big hit based on the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table or the low-probability mode validity table stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27 described later. The mode validity table may be selected one by one to determine validity.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game to the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the normal jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). In addition, MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variable jackpot, specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command including the lottery result of the big winning lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5, and the sound lamp control device 5 executes the pattern variation display by the pattern display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As described above, the MPU 41 sets any one of 'A01' to 'A03' in which 'A' indicating 5R normal jackpot is attached to the variation patterns '01' to '03' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command when the lottery result is 'normal jackpot'. When the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 sets any one of ``B01'' to ``B03'' in which ``B'' indicating 5R probability variable big win is attached to the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03'' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 sets any one of ``C01'' to ``C03'' in which ``C'' indicating 16R probability variable big win is attached to the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03'' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 sets one of "D01" to "D08", which is the variation pattern "01" to "08" with "D" indicating failure, in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 36, and terminates the variation start process. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 36, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display section 36 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412 . Further, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and clears the "number of consecutive failures" to 0 when the success/failure result is a jackpot.

[Set value change process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and if the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the set value change processing is terminated, and if the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value change process is terminated, and if it is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1703), that is, whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45. That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the game is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, if the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and if the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (step S1704), and causes the set value display unit 45 to display a number indicating the read set value (step S1705). This makes it possible to confirm the current set value. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No), i.e., if the power is not turned on while the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, the setting value change processing ends.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1711 when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No).

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation part 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display part 45 before rotation, and on the contrary, when the set value change operation part 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display part 45 before rotation.

If the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed to "1". Further, when the number displayed on the setting value display part 45 is "6", it may be prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display part 45 is "1", it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as the setting value, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation part 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid set value. Therefore, by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, the set value saved in the RAM 412 is changed. By turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the setting value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45. When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and when the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the setting value change process ends. When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), in the set value display unit 45, energization to the 7-segment display is interrupted so that the number indicating the set value is turned off, and the set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 14A) and the high probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14B) are selected according to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. That is, since the same set value is selected for the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the setting value can be easily changed. However, the set value in the low-probability mode and the set value in the high-probability mode may be changed separately. In this case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode can be set to different levels (numerical values), for example, the setting value of the low-probability mode is "1" and the setting value of the high-probability mode is "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and determines whether or not the read out number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), shifts the process to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening)/the number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls reaches 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805-S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in the base information, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls and the number of out balls for base calculation, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 ends, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809), and ends the specific performance information update process. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, the role ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main processing of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 of FIG. 31, and when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the process shifts to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 to be described later. If the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and if the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the process shifts to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. , “0”, and “0” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 turns on the BL display flag (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 29%. "8.", "1", "2", and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, energization to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the current base BL.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "2", "3", and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% of the previous game is displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3” and “3” indicating 3% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process ends. Incidentally, when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. , “0”, and “0” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 turns on the BL display flag (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process ends. Incidentally, when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the second-last 60,000-ball base B2.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when the audio lamp control device 5 is started, NMI interrupt processing during power failure, and the like.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game effect process (step S2003), a jackpot game effect process (step S2004), and a set value suggestion process (step S2005) in the secondary timer interrupt process.

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to a game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability of the gaming machine 10, and determines and stores (sets) the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, by executing the set value suggesting process in a jackpot game for a predetermined period, five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) of game set values (non-set values) other than the set values are displayed in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting processing of FIG. Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. Also, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub timer interrupt process by the starting process of the sound lamp control device, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7 segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

By the way, the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 with the turning on of the gaming machine 10 as a trigger, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, so that repeated presentation of the same information in the 7-segment display section 39 and monotonous display of information in the 7-segment display section 39 can be prevented.

Here, if the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012, and if the display order setting flag is OFF (step S2011: No), shifts the process to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the set value change flag is ON (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to ON in step S2121 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 described later. When the setting value change flag is ON (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to OFF (step S2013), and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period is set when the set value is changed. By setting the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display part 39 when the setting value is changed in this way, the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the setting value, so that the monotonous presentation of information in the 7-segment display part 39 can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the setting values from the RAM 512, and sets the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 with reference to the setting values and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36A, in the number display order determination table, the number display order is defined by lottery random numbers for each of game set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 lottery random numbers from 0 to 119, each lottery random number is associated with one display order, and each display order has the same selection probability. The display order includes the display order A1 to A120 selected for the setting value 1, the display order B1 to B120 selected for the setting value 2, the display order C1 to C120 selected for the setting value 3, the display order D1 to D120 selected for the setting value 4, the display order E1 to E120 selected for the setting value 5, and the display order F1 to F120 selected for the setting value 6, for each setting value 1 to 6. , 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value 1 is selected defines the order of displaying the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the game setting values (non-set values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" specifying the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number because the set value is 1, the number "1" specifying the set value 1 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39. - 特許庁

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value 2 is selected defines the order of displaying the setting values "1" and "3" to "6" other than the number "2" specifying the setting value 2, and the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the setting values 2 to 6 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when the set value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" specifying the set value 2 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39. - 特許庁

The display orders C1 to C120 selected when the setting value 3 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the set value is 3, the number “3” specifying the set value 3 is not displayed in the 7-segment display section 39.

The display orders D1 to D120 selected when the setting value 4 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number “4” specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

The display orders E1 to E120 selected when the setting value 5 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number "5" specifying the setting value 5 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number “5” specifying the set value 5 is not displayed in the 7-segment display section 39.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 defines the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "5" that specify the setting values 1 to 5 other than the number "6" that specifies the setting value 6 (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the number “6” specifying the setting value 6 is not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 .

When the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10.

Thus, in the game machine 10, the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the set value after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order during a predetermined period when a predetermined condition (for example, power-on or setting change) is satisfied. Since the game machine 10 is often turned on before opening the game hall, the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display part 39 is set with the power-on of the game machine 10 as a trigger, and the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display part 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, so that repeated presentation of the same information in the 7-segment display section 39 and monotonous display of information in the 7-segment display section 39 can be prevented.

In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when the set value is changed. Predetermined conditions in this case will be described in a third embodiment described later, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, the start of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, and the like. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set by satisfying these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display section 39 from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36A, for the same setting value, the probability of selecting all number display orders is the same, but the probability of selecting the number display order does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability of selecting at least part of the number display order for the same set value is different from other number display orders. That is, it is conceivable to make a specific display order more likely to be selected and, conversely, to make it more difficult to select a specific display order. By setting the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected according to the set value to be different from other number display orders, it is possible to facilitate selection of a specific number display order and to make it difficult to select a specific number display order according to the set value. That is, unlike the case where the probability of selecting the display order of all numbers is made the same, it is possible to easily specify the specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to specify the specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the high set value to the end when the set value is low, the player is prevented from specifying the low set value at an early stage while making the player feel the expectation of the high set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early while suppressing the decrease in interest in the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 . Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more), the display order of numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the number corresponding to the high set value and the number corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until just before the set value is identified as the high set value, leaving the possibility of the low set value until just before the player grasps the high set value. As a result, the player can pay attention to whether the high set value is advantageous to the player or the low set value is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the feeling of excitement right up to the moment when the high set value is detected. It is also conceivable that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not late, for example, the display order that makes it easy to select the slowest display order, regardless of the set value. In this case, since the number indicating the most unfavorable non-set value for the player is displayed at the end, there remains the possibility of the most disadvantageous non-set value for the player and the non-set value more advantageous to the player until the last number is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the game set value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine 10 can be suppressed, and the lowering of the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

Also, it is conceivable to set the numerical display order so that the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set values and the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set values is later so as to facilitate selection. For example, it is conceivable that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to the low setting value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to the high setting value are displayed in a later numerical display order so that the number display order is easily selected. In this case as well, the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player and the possibility of a low set value unfavorable to the player are included until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy the excitement of whether the set value is a high set value or a low set value until just before the player grasps the set value.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (the set value is 6), it is conceivable to set the numerical display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values higher than the set value is later so that it is easy to select. For example, it is conceivable to set the selection rate of the display order higher than the priority of the number indicating the non-set value having a higher probability of advantageous determination than the set value than the number indicating the non-set value having a lower probability of advantageous determination than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set values in this way, the player can expect the possibility that the set values are higher than the actual set values just before grasping the set values. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before grasping the set value. Conversely, except for the case where the set value is the lowest set value (the set value is 1), it is conceivable to set the numerical display order in which the display order of the numerals corresponding to the non-set values lower than the set value is delayed so that it is easy to select. For example, it is conceivable to set the priority of numbers indicating non-set values having a lower probability of advantageous judgment than the set value to a higher selection rate of the display order than the numbers indicating non-set values having a higher probability of advantageous judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set values, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set values are left as non-display numbers immediately before the set values are grasped. As a result, the final set value candidates are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, since the game set values that are advantageous to the player are grasped as the set values in the end, the pleasure when the set values are grasped is improved.

In addition, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value of 5 or more) is later so that the number display order can be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that the number display order can be easily selected. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting the high possibility of the set value.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, effect pattern type counter, variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Also, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S2002), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and is processed, and is stored in, for example, the processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38A), the variation type table (see FIG. 38B) and the effect type table (see FIGS. 39A to 39C) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop pattern is a decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed first in the pattern display part 341, the second stop pattern is a decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop pattern is a pattern that is stopped and displayed last. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 39A), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 39B), and a special reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 39C).

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decoration symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38 (A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", the pattern combination indicating that "333" is a definite variable jackpot (either the 5R definite variable jackpot or the 16R definite variable jackpot), the pattern combination indicating that "777" is a 16R definite variable jackpot, and the 5R normal jackpot, 5R definite variable jackpot and 16R definite variable jackpot other than "333" and "777". It is premised that it is a symbol combination that indicates that.

When the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', there is no sorting of ``3'' and ``7'' as the first stop patterns, and the first stop patterns are determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``3'' and ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop pattern, and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the double symbol combination other than the ``333'' symbol combination whose decorative symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. When the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', when decoration patterns other than ``3'' excluding ``7'' are determined as the first stop pattern, the MPU 51 executes 5R probability variable promotion performance for indicating 5R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is ``16 probability variable jackpot'', all the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' are sorted, and the first stop pattern is determined from the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' with a predetermined probability. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the stop display result of decorative patterns can stop and display the symbol combination other than ``777'' which suggests 5R probability variable big win or 5R normal big win. When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes 16R probability variable promotion performance for specifying 16R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Then, when the lottery result is a big win and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display portion 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is ``missing'', all of the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' are sorted, and the first stop pattern is determined from the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol based on the failure type selected based on the failure type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is the ready-to-win except for front and back out, the second stop pattern is determined to be the same as the first stop design, and the final stop design is determined to be different from the first stop design and the designs before and after the first stop design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Incidentally, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". A variation pattern command 'B02' with a lottery result of '5R probability variable jackpot' and a variation pattern of '02' is associated with a variation display time of '60s' and a variation type of 'super ready-to-win performance pattern', and a variation pattern command 'C03' of a lottery result of '16R probability variable jackpot' and a variation pattern of '03' is associated with a variation display time of '90s' and a variation type of 'special ready-to-win performance pattern'. Furthermore, a variation pattern command 'D04' with a lottery result of 'loss' and a variation pattern of '04' is associated with a variation display time of '7s' and a variation type of 'non-ready performance pattern', and a variation pattern command 'D05' with a lottery result of 'loss' and a variation pattern of '05' is associated with a variation display time of '10s' and a variation type of 'non-reach performance pattern'.

Further, FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal ready-to-win effect, FIG. 39(B) is a super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super ready-to-win effect, and FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are five kinds of effect types corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), "production pattern X1" to "production pattern X5" are defined as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the normal ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, the normal ready-to-win performance in which the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation performance in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed is finished, and the final individual performance type is the normal ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the super ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal ready-to-win performances executed after the end of high-speed fluctuation performances, and are performances that develop into super ready-to-win performances with higher expectations for big hits than normal ready-to-win performances and longer performance execution times than normal ready-to-win performances as the final individual performance types. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into a super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the special ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. When determining that the variation type (performance pattern) is the special ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance pattern Z1 to performance pattern Z3 included in the special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal ready-to-win performance and super ready-to-win performance after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and are performances that develop into special ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation for big win than normal ready-to-win performance and super ready-to-win performance as the final individual performance type and longer performance execution time than normal ready-to-win performance. The special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table may include a special ready-to-reach performance pattern that develops into a special ready-to-win performance after a high-speed fluctuation performance or a normal ready-to-reach performance ends without going through at least one of the normal ready-to-win performance and the super ready-to-win performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets, in the RAM 512, a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern command, a variation type table, a performance type table and a performance type counter, and a stop pattern combination of decorative symbols determined based on the performance type counter, and a variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the pattern display part 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and stops and displays the variations of the plurality of decorative patterns in order. During the variable display of the decoration pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (production pattern type) specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed by the pattern display part 341, the speaker 26, the illumination part 27 and the like.

Further, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effecting flag to ON. This variable game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect which are executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the big win game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2109: No), shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310), and terminates the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, and when the received command is not the round game end command (step S2111: No), the process proceeds to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2114, and if the received command is not the special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No), the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the set value suggesting process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Also, the ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the set value suggesting process of FIG.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process proceeds to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the big win game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Also, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display control process of FIG.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a set value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a set value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a set value change command (step S2119: No), shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command determination process. The setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the sub timer interrupt process, when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the variable game effect in line with the effect pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the secondary timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending addition image showing the display result of the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed in the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion process]
In the set value suggesting process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39 are controlled. Further, in the setting value suggesting process, a process of displaying on the symbol display section 341 an ending addition image showing the display result of the 7-segment display section 39 in the jackpot game is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202 when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2206 when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No).

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 , the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382 . At this time, the game ball 99 moving from the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 .

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion downward flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is downward (step S2203). The stopper portion downward movement flag is referenced in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 or not. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), further sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S2205), and ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to on in step S2203, is set to on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 . Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207 when the stopper portion downward movement flag is on (step S2206: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2216 when the stopper portion downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No).

<Step S2207>
When the stopper part downward movement flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to ON (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the process shifts to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
At step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the lowering time counter set at step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined by whether or not the special out ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. If the condition for returning the stopper part 383 to the upper limit position is that the special out balls are not detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, the special out balls can be accurately counted.

Here, when the value of the lowering time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212, and when the value of the lowering time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward motion counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward flag, which is set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 .

<Step S2214>
In step S<b>2214 , the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 . In other words, the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling turning on/off of the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game at the ending of the jackpot game after the lapse of a specific period for each jackpot game. Details of the 7-segment display section control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes ending additional image control processing for displaying an additional image corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending addition image control processing, it becomes possible to confirm the lighting/light-out state of the 7-segment display section 39 also in the pattern display section 341 . The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper portion downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to on (step S2216). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the jackpot game effect (ending effect) to end by means of the jackpot game effect end flag. Here, when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G lit in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 when the jackpot game effect is terminated. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39 can be lit only during the ending of the big win game.

Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display part 39, all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values) defining the probability that the lottery result of the big win lottery in the game machine 10 will be a big win are displayed. Therefore, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is executed. As a result, the player can specify or guess the non-set value each time a big win game is executed, so that the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value in the big win game. Further, by obtaining the information for specifying or estimating the non-set value for each big win game, when the number of times of the big win game increases, for example, when the number of times of consecutive big wins increases, all (five) non-set values can be grasped, and in this case, the set value can be grasped. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, so that it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, and the interest in the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
At step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display section control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the set value suggesting process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display unit control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by adding it in step S2208 in the setting value suggesting process of FIG. The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode of the big win. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and when the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, when it is 0 (step S2302: No), it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7 segment display section 39, so the 7 segment display section control processing ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
At step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display section control information from the 7-segment display section control information storage area (see FIG. 42A) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display section control information is information necessary for controlling the 7 segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is accumulated). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control details for the 7-segment display section 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display section control information read out from the 7-segment display section control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display section 39 based on this control content (step S2305). Details of the determination of the control content and the control for the 7-segment display section 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display section control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display section control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42B is a diagram showing an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display section control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is an area for storing the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the order of control targets of the segments A to G when each number is displayed during a predetermined period (period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37). This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

A number display order storage area stores the order of numbers (number display order) to be displayed in a 7-segment display part 39 during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode to the end of an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display order is determined in the above-described display order setting process of FIG. 35 based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) that is set for the setting value that defines the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be a big win. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42(B), the display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table for the set value 1 in the above-described number display order setting process, and "2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6" is stored as the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. That is, as long as the setting is not changed during the business of the game hall, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period of the same business day. Thus, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display part 39 every time the predetermined period starts, so that the numbers whose number display order is early are easily displayed, and the numbers whose number display order is late are difficult to be displayed. For example, when the numerical display order is ``2''->``3''->``4''->``5''->``6'', since the numbers are displayed in this order, ``2'' and ``3'' are easily displayed, but ``5'' and ``6'' are difficult to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily specified while allowing the setting value to be estimated and specified, so that the user can enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. Further, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers with early number display order are easy to be displayed and numbers with late number display order are difficult to be displayed, so that, for example, when the set value is set low (when the probability of big win in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting with a small number of first hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely terminating the game in the gaming machine 10 during play, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, it is expected that more numbers will be displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as the number of times of the specific period in the predetermined period increases (the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases). Therefore, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can be specified among a plurality of non-set values other than the set values also increases. As a result, since the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, a large amount of information for specifying the non-set value can be obtained, so that the candidates for the set value can be narrowed down. By allowing 35 or more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, the player can specify all non-set values, and as a result, can recognize the set values. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to specify all the non-set values, that is, to recognize the set values, and can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the jackpot succession continues (whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed when the power is turned on to the game machine 10 or when the setting is changed, but it may be determined when a big win game for a big win (first win) in a low probability mode is started. In this way, the number display order is determined when a big win game such as the first win is started, and the number display order is determined, for example, every predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the display order of the numbers, so that variations in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 to be displayed based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the past for the purpose of specifying all the non-set values and recognizing the set values.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . The segment control order is fixed to segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10 rather than being determined by turning on the gaming machine 10, changing settings, winning a jackpot, or the like. Thus, by fixing the segment control order as an order unique to the game machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 even before the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when setting values are changed, similarly to the number display order, but it is also conceivable that it is determined for each business day. In this case, compared to the case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. As a result, the difficulty until all the non-set values are specified and the set values are recognized is heightened, so that when the set values are set low (when the probability of a big hit in a low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting at an early stage. This prevents the player from prematurely terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Also, the segment control order may be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already displayed information storage area is an area for storing information about numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period, numbers in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been controlled. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information related to a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes number 1 already displayed flag, number 2 already displayed flag, number 3 already displayed flag, number 4 already displayed flag, number 5 already displayed flag, and number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in the predetermined period when it is set to OFF. The number 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 4 is not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 6 is not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is a display target number in the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 1 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 2 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 3 display object flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 3 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 4 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 5 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 6 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF.

The target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is subject to lighting/light-out control in display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This target segment flag information includes a segment A target flag, a segment B target flag, a segment C target flag, a segment D target flag, a segment E target flag, a segment F target flag, and a segment G target flag. The segment A target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment A target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment B target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment C target flag indicates that the segment C has become a control object in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and indicates that the segment C is not a control object when it is set to OFF. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment D target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment E subject flag indicates that the segment E is subject to control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment E is not subject to control when set to OFF. The segment F target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment F object flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment F has become a control object in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment F is not a control object. The segment G target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display section 39 is subject to lighting/lighting control in display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment G target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment G is not a control target.

In the already displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all flags included in already displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside a predetermined period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (initial jackpot) in a low-probability mode (at the beginning of a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37). In this embodiment, all the flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are set to OFF (cleared) when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes) in step S2405 in the ending addition image control process in FIG.

43 to 45 are diagrams showing control examples (display examples) of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control information storage area and update examples of the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an update example of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS.

As described above, in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display section 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content (step S2305). Thereafter, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are determined according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)) and the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, some of the 7 segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are subject to lighting and extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the specific period is 5), the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. When the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42B, the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, segment C is lit, segment D is lit, and segment E is lit. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, the state shown in FIG. 43A in which all the segments A to G are turned off (non-controlled state) is changed to a partially controlled state in which the segments A, B, D and E are turned on as shown in FIG. 43B.

The change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by setting the segments A to E as objects to be controlled in order and lighting or extinguishing the segments A to E. Also, when the segments A to E are turned on or off in order as controlled objects, the segments A to E to be controlled may be flashed to indicate that they are controlled objects. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display section 39 ends, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43A to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), five segments A to E out of the segments A to G of the number 2 displayed first on the seven-segment display section 39 are subject to control, and segments F and G are not subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43C, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed in the displayed number flag information, all the flags of the number 1 displayed flag, the number 2 displayed flag, the number 3 displayed flag, the number 4 displayed flag, the number 5 displayed flag, and the number 6 displayed flag are kept off. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag corresponding to the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. Further, in the already-displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are to be controlled, the segment A already-targeted flag, segment B already-targeted flag, segment C already-targeted flag, segment D already-targeted flag, and segment E already-targeted flag for segments A-E are set to ON.

Further, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C), the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period is 10), a total of 10 segments A to G are controlled in the 7 segment display unit 39. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, seven (all) segments A to G are subject to lighting/extinguishing control, so that the number in the first display order is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and further, three segments A to C are subject to lighting/extinction control for the second display order with respect to the number in the second display order. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42B, and the previously displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, the non-controlled state in which all the segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) is changed to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 by turning on the segments A, B, D, E and G and turning off the segments C and F as shown in FIG. 44(B). 4(C) is changed to a partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled. In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), since the second number displayed is 3, segments A to C are lit.

The change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) and the change from the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segments controlled state shown in FIG. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are turned on or off in order, the segment to be controlled may be flashed to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the previously displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segments controlled state shown in FIG. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44B, all the segments A to E of the segments A to G for the number 2 displayed first on the 7-segment display section 39 are to be controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45A, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control to display the number 2 is finished, so as shown in FIG. After that, in the already displayed segment flag information, all the already targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to OFF. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, in the already displayed segment flag information, the segment A existing target flag, segment B existing target flag, and segment C existing target flag for segments A to C are set to ON. That is, each time all the target flags of the already displayed segment flag information are set to ON (each time seven segments A to G are set to be controlled), the already displayed flag for the number that was the display target in the already displayed number flag information is set to ON, and the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the currently displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is set to ON.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values) that define the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 will be a big win. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

By the way, some game machines, such as the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, have a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select the set values. In this case, the gaming hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected ball output value. When the set value is set low, there is a tendency to desire a game machine in which the set value is unknown to the player in order to prevent the player from stopping the game due to recognition of the low set value by the player.

On the other hand, in order to play a game on the gaming machine 10 with a higher expected ball output value, the player desires a game property in which the set value can be guessed (narrowed down to a plurality of set values) or recognized for the game machine having the set value. Thus, there is a tendency for game halls and players to desire contradicting gaming machines that suggest or specify game set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning opening 316, the game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38 in a specific period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) staying in the staying lane 381 after the elapse of a specific period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled according to the counted number. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor illuminated unless at least the lottery results in the big win lottery result in a big win and the game shifts to a big win game. Therefore, the setting values are not assumed or recognized unless the game is shifted to a big winning game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37, for example, one to two (about one in 10R minutes of the round game) entry of the game ball 99 is expected for one 16R jackpot game. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value by the 7-segment display section 39 in one big win. On the other hand, the 7-segment display part 39 is controlled according to the total number of game balls 99 entered into a special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of a jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending) in the normal jackpot game. In other words, when the first win is a variable probability big win, the prescribed period does not end as long as the high-probability mode continues, and continues until the opening/closing execution mode of the normal big win game ends when the normal big win is won. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and the set value, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 as the jackpot succession in the high probability mode continues, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately. can be identified with certainty. Therefore, in the game machine 10, information is displayed that makes it possible to estimate the set value according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in the predetermined period. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot consecutive games, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value) when the number of consecutive games is small, but as the number of consecutive games increases, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 increases, so that the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value can be estimated by specifying or estimating part or all of the plurality of non-setting values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . In this way, the game machine 10 can meet the wishes of the store by suppressing the setting values from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), and can also meet the wishes of the players by making it possible to speculate more accurate non-set values (set values) by means of the jackpot series. As a result, the gaming machine 10 is provided that meets the demands of both the store side and the player side.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed may display an image suggesting or specifying a set value. An image suggesting or specifying a set value is displayed, for example, on a jackpot determination screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as ART or AT, a continuation screen and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a set value, such as a jackpot game end screen, there is a certain probability that it is a specific set value or more (for example, an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6) or more), a high set value (e.g., set value 5 or 6), an odd set value (e.g., set value 1, 3, or 5), an even set value (e.g., set value 2, 4, or 6), or not a specific set value (e.g., set value 1 negation). A screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates that the maximum setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set.

However, in suggesting or specifying setting values in conventional slot machines, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or specifying setting values is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or specifying setting values is set low so that the setting values are not easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a set value that the set value is advantageous to the player or indicating that the set value is a specific set value is set low. In addition, the suggestion of the odd set value or the even set value tends to have a low reliability, and the reliability is often set to about 60%, for example. Furthermore, in the slot machine, even if the high setting value is suggested or specified, the high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6) is not suggested or specified, and in particular, the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6) is not suggested or specified. That is, the slot machine does not present disadvantageous information to the player, such as denying the high set value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, information (non-set value) that allows estimation of a set value is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 as a number according to the number of specific conditions that are established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. In other words, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify or guess a part of the non-set values, so that the set values can be guessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, which is fundamentally different from the method of suggesting or specifying the set value at a fixed rate, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. In addition, in this embodiment, a non-set value (set value) is specified or suggested depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, the difficulty of specifying or guessing some or all of a plurality of non-set values decreases, which is different from the suggestion or explicit indication of set values in conventional gaming machines such as slot machines.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency of presenting information for specifying the set values does not decrease, and the presentation of information for specifying the non-set values (set values) continues as long as the predetermined period continues (as long as the jackpot continues). Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the setting value, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, all non-set values can be identified when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values during a predetermined period. In other words, regardless of whether the non-set value is high or low, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where setting values are suggested or specified in conventional slot machines, even information that is disadvantageous to the player is presented such as denying the maximum setting value. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the setting value, so that the player can determine whether or not to continue the game in the game machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) so that the display order of numbers is later so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that the number display order can be easily selected. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting the high possibility of the set value.

[Ending addition image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51 reads various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41 in step S2401, that is, already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information updated with the passage of the current specific period, and based on these information, determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that indicates the display content of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that allows the non-set value to be specified or estimated (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command for causing the pattern display section 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the symbol display portion 341 displays an additional image as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47(A1) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending of the probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47(A2) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending of the normal jackpot. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C) are screen examples (setting value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of the variable probability big winning game, as the first half part of the ending effect, an image is displayed in the symbol display part 341 indicating that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are to be entered after the end of the variable probability big winning game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, as the first half part of the ending effect, an image is displayed in the symbol display section 341 indicating that the normal jackpot game is ended and the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (time-saving mode) is entered. Incidentally, in the first half of the ending effect, in addition to an image clearly indicating the game mode to be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game, an image clearly indicating the number of consecutive jackpot games and the number of balls to be played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control processing in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C), the additional image shows the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), as shown in FIG. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) through FIG. 44(B), an additional image including a setting value suggesting image simulating the display state shown in FIG. Furthermore, when all the five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by the end of the predetermined period, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . In this case, it can be identified that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

Thus, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 until the end of one prescribed period is displayed as an additional image including five set value suggesting images imitating the 7-segment display part 39 as the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, even if it is not possible to know that the information about the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, if the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 is overlooked, or if the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39 in the predetermined period is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending and recognize or guess the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 for each jackpot game.

As the ending effect of the jackpot game, it is a design matter whether or not an additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display part 341, and it is conceivable not to display the additional image on the pattern display part 341 in the ending effect. When the additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number displayed in the past during a predetermined period, it becomes difficult to specify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, and furthermore, to guess or recognize the set value unless the number is stored or recorded. In other words, by not displaying the additional image in the ending performance, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, so that the set value of the game machine 10 can be recognized at an early stage, or at least the recognition that the set value is not high can be prevented. As a result, the game of the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from being terminated early, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 can be suppressed.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending addition image control process ends.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags to off), and terminates the ending addition image control process. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the previously displayed information storage area when the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or increase the accuracy of the guess, more game balls 99 need to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, and the hurdles until the non-set value (set value) is specified are high. Therefore, there is an advantage for the game hall that the set values are not easily known to the players. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to specify or guess the set value. In addition, the game machine 10 can be provided with the game property that the setting value can be specified or estimated with the winning of the jackpot lottery as an opportunity, the accuracy of the guessing of the setting value is enhanced by the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (continuous jackpot), and the setting value can be recognized in some cases. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Also, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and when the high probability mode is set, the game is not ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even when a player who cannot know the timing (the end of a predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed progresses the game, the game is prevented from ending just before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena actions of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values (set values) can be identified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode of the first win, not only does it require at least one jackpot winning before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, but even if the predetermined period starts, the hurdles until the non-set value (set value) can be specified are high as described above. 1 and you'll win a fair number of jackpot draws. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (ease of receiving the jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently determined. Thereby, when the non-set value (set value) can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, the player can determine the ball output performance of the game machine 10 during the game including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the unit jackpot lottery number of times, so that it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is large, it is possible to make a decision to continue the game by comprehensively considering it. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is small, it is possible to give up the continuation of the game by comprehensively considering it.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, even if it is not possible to know that the information about the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, if the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 is overlooked, or if the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39 in the predetermined period is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending and recognize or guess the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 for each jackpot game, and enjoy the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed, a predetermined operation of the gaming machine 10 by the player may cause the display portion such as the pattern display portion 341 to display the display history of the 7-segment display portion 39 for a predetermined period. Thus, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display section 39 on the pattern display section 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm the display contents in the past in the 7-segment display section 39 when forgetting. This makes it possible to specify or guess the non-set value based on the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 . Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display part 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, there is an advantage that it is possible to confirm the past display contents on the 7-segment display part 39 when the user forgets. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in a standby state or the like, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the empty gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加In other words, it becomes possible to specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person, and so-called hyena behavior is permitted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history for the predetermined period is restricted except for the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on the privilege obtained by others.

In the present embodiment, when the first winning is a variable probability big winning, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first winning big winning game to the normal big winning game for the normal big winning in the high probability mode. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to displaying the number corresponding to the non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the number or the alphabet corresponding to the non-set value may be displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the non-set value explicit reach effect for specifying the non-set value may be executed in the symbol display section 341. As the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect, when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, it is conceivable to stop and display the decoration pattern with double numbers corresponding to the non-set value, for example. In this way, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363, and the non-set value is clearly indicated on the symbol display part 341. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, not only whether the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win in the variable game, but also the player can see the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 362 or the second in the variable game. Paying attention to the numbers stopped and displayed in the special pattern display portion 363, and paying attention to the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the pattern display portion 341, the variation game can be enjoyed. Also, when the non-set value explicit ready-to-win performance is executed as one of the ready-to-win performances, it is conceivable to stop and display the numbers in the ready-to-win of the decoration pattern of the numbers corresponding to the set value as a misalignment without matching the numbers. For example, when the set value is 1, the decoration patterns can be stopped and displayed at ``222'', ``333'', ``444'', ``555'' and ``666'', but the display is not stopped at ``111'' and the reach when the decoration pattern is 1 is always lost. In this way, it is desirable that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers corresponding to the set values, but it is desirable that the decoration patterns are not stopped and displayed with double numbers, for example, 5 or 6, which negates the high set value, so that the ready-to-win performance can be enjoyed from a different point of view than the conventional one.

Also, it is conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 or the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect can be executed only at a specific timing. Thus, by displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 only at the specific timing, or executing the non-set value explicit ready-to-win performance, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the variable game executed at the specific timing.

As the specific timing, for example, in the variable game executed in the variable probability game state or the time reduction game state, the timing of notifying that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win in the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 and the symbol display part 341 can be considered. By explicitly indicating or suggesting the non-set value in the variable game in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state in this way, the hold is quickly digested by the high frequency support mode, and the variable game in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state which tends to become monotonous can be enjoyed. In addition, it is conceivable to set the specific timing when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range, when the number of variable games to be executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state is small (eg 1 to 10 times) or large (eg 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more, etc.) It is conceivable to set. That is, when the jackpot occurs early after shifting to the variable probability gaming state, or when the number of times of variable games before reaching the jackpot becomes a hooked state, the non-set value may be specified or suggested. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a privilege for the early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a remedy for the addiction. In addition, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the time saving game state is small (for example, 1 time to 10 times), or just before the time saving game state ends (for example, 90 times to 100 times). In this case, a non-set value is specified or suggested as a privilege for a big win early after the end of the big win game or a big win just before the end of the time saving.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot), and the number that satisfies the specific condition (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within the specific period) is set, A case has been described where all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set.

By the way, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. In other words, all or part of the specific information is divided and presented a plurality of times in the jackpot series. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times, it is difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game to be executed first unless the specific information to be presented at the ending of the jackpot game to be executed first is stored or recorded. That is, if the specific information presented in the past on the 7-segment display section 39 is not accurately stored or recorded, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is troublesome to accurately store or record the specific information presented on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past, and as a result, the player may give up specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the enjoyment of the game by being able to specify or guess the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period, unlike the first embodiment described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience caused when the specific information is presented a plurality of times during the predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in the present embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be memorized or recorded by the player. As a result, a player can specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specified information presented only once in one predetermined period, and is freed from the trouble of accurately storing or recording the presented specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In one example of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that the game ball is entered into the special out ball mouth of the croon device. Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending (after the specified period ends) of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 only once after the predetermined period has ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggesting process, the 7-segment display section control process, and the ending addition image control process are different from those in the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display section control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Set value suggestion process]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the set value suggestion process in the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), unlike the set value suggestion process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 A process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 for receiving 99 and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 for a predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). Thus, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the predetermined period is counted once in the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Further, in the setting value suggesting process of the present embodiment, under the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement control of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 and the processing of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 for a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display portion control processing (step S2502), and the ending addition image control. The processing (step S2503) is also executed on the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes) based on the stopper part downward movement flag set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2203).

[7-segment display section control processing]
The 7-segment display unit control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game is started as described above (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends). Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display section control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display section control processing in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order and already displayed information (see FIG. 42) of the 7-segment display section control information, only the control order of the 7-segment display section control information is read (step S2504). . That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled (specific information is presented) only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period (after the predetermined period ends), so there is no need to read out the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending addition image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending addition image control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending addition image control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46), but step S2404 at the end of the ending addition image control processing in the first embodiment is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control processing of the present embodiment is executed with the 5R normal jackpot as a trigger (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 48), the already displayed information storage area is initialized in step S2405 without judging that the 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (number) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be memorized or recorded by the player. As a result, a player can specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specified information presented only once in one predetermined period, and is freed from the trouble of accurately storing or recording the presented specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or speculated. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed has been described. Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where numbers are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed is described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the game machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the game machine 10 is powered off or the set values are changed, and the control order of the segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed. Therefore, when the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the already presented specific information can be obtained, and new specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, there is concern that interest in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period, the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed may decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order of presenting the specific information (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order of presenting specific information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even when the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, the player can be interested in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period and the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and can also be interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. Thus, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game by presenting specific information that can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) according to the number that satisfies a specific condition.

Predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order of presenting the specific information include, for example, winning a jackpot, starting the opening of the jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game. By setting a predetermined condition in this manner, the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the order of presentation of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. As a result, for example, the presentation order of the specific information in the jackpot game can be made interesting, so that the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific jackpot (for example, a variable probability jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low-probability mode) is won, a specific jackpot game (for example, a probability-variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low-probability mode) opening, an opening/closing execution mode, or an ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the number of times the specific information presentation order is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined conditions are not limited to specific jackpots or jackpot games. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information will be presented with respect to the previously presented specific information, it becomes more difficult to specify all non-set values (specify setting values), and early specification of all non-set values (specification of setting values) can be prevented. As a result, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Further, the predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific effect is determined or executed as a variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, for example. Typically, the specific effect includes a premium effect in which a jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is fixed among variable game effects. Furthermore, as a specific effect, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 to be stop-displayed or temporarily-stopped-displayed (intermediate stop-displayed). For example, in the pattern display part 341, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at ``777'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach dot like ``767'', when it is stop-displayed at a specific non-reach-out dot (discrete dot) such as '367', etc., a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) which clearly indicates that the development effect is executed when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect can be considered. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development performance is to be executed, it is conceivable that the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7", and the middle pattern, such as "development", is temporarily stopped and displayed to clarify that the development performance is to be executed. Even when a predetermined condition is set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that the one-shot jackpot is consecutive multiple times, or that the presentation order of the same specific information is consecutive multiple times. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed). Therefore, since it becomes easier to obtain new information as the specific information, it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when the new specific information cannot be obtained, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the order of presentation of the specific information that is determined (changed) for the predetermined condition that is met first may be prioritized, or the order of presentation of the specific information that is determined (changed) for the predetermined condition that is met last may be prioritized.

In one example of the present embodiment, the display order of numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values as specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started (the predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started), and the end of the predetermined period is set according to the display order. All or part of the identifying numbers are displayed.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on display order setting processing, which is different from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is the jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot is the first win and the predetermined period has started. Whether or not the jackpot is in the low-probability mode, for example, when the jackpot game is started, probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low-probability mode or in the high-probability mode is included in the jackpot game start command, and when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low-probability mode is set on or off based on the probability mode information in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined by checking the flag with the MPU 51 . In addition, the probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

Then, when the MPU 51 is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot is the first hit (a jackpot at the start of a predetermined period), the process proceeds to step S2603. On the other hand, the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process when it is not a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when it is a jackpot in the high probability mode (step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of the segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and ends the display order setting process.

Here, the display order of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. The determined display order of numbers is stored in the RAM 512 .

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders of segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. Then, the control order of the segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders in the same order for each number by the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. Also, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512 .

In this embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order of each number may be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined for each predetermined period. As a result, by determining the order of presenting specific information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, the player can be interested in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period and the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and can also be interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. As a result, by presenting the specific information in accordance with the number of times a specific condition for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is satisfied, it is possible to more effectively increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that satisfies a specific condition in a specific period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period (the ending of the jackpot game), and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated when the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed for a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has passed).

By the way, when the player misses or forgets to present the specific information during the prescribed period, it is assumed that the player wishes to reconfirm the specific information in order to specify or guess a plurality of non-set values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. Also, when the player changes, it is assumed that the player after the change wishes to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the prescribed period, the specific information is not presented outside the prescribed period, so the specific information cannot be reconfirmed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period. In this way, the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period can be presented, so that the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past during the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when the player misses or forgets the presentation of the specific information in the specified period, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the specific information presented to the past player. As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the players in the past, so the convenience of specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values) is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a waiting state (customer waiting state) period in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is the standby period, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past while the game is not being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of visual recognition of various effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game effects and jackpot game effects.

In addition, when all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented during the standby state, it is conceivable that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed on a specific display screen that can be shifted to in the standby state. Passwords and commands may be made available by being displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending or the like in a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands may be obtained by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 in the jackpot game, and reading the matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smart phone or a mobile phone, thereby being transmitted from an external server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby period on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, only a player who can enter the password or a command, that is, only a player who was presented with all or part of the specific information, can confirm all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby period. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena action or free riding in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by other players.

It is also conceivable to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smart phone or a mobile phone on a specific display screen that can be shifted to in the standby state, thereby presenting all or part of the specific information presented in the past on the mobile terminal.

Also, it is conceivable to set the special period during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening/closing execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented in a state in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not specified or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the indication or suggestion of the result of the big winning lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. In addition, since the big winning game is executed after the result of the big winning lottery indicates the big winning by the variable game, the interest of the player tends to decrease, but the interest in the big winning game is improved by presenting the specific information presented in the past in such a big winning game.

Moreover, as a special period, setting during a variable game is also conceivable. Here, as a theoretical value, the execution time of the variation game is longer than the execution time of the jackpot variation game in the total time for the game to be executed (the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on minus the standby state time). Therefore, by enabling presentation of past specific information during a variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, it is preferable to limit the presentation of the specific information during a certain period before the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where the ready-to-win performance is not executed as the variable game performance or when the variable time is short. As a result, it is possible to prevent visual recognition of the indication or suggestion of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the stationary display of the decoration pattern.

Further, the presentation of the past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it is possible to present the past specific information at a timing not expected by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a playability with unexpectedness. In addition, since the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the game machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the game machine 10, even a player who has little knowledge of the game machine 10 can know the specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in the standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the reach production is executed at a certain rate (including 100%) when a specific reach production is scheduled to be executed in the variable game, and presenting the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the variable game or jackpot game. For example, it is decided to present the specified information. When specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select the game machine 10 for executing the game from an empty stand in consideration of the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the game machine 10 for executing the game are improved. In addition, when execution of a specific ready-to-win performance is scheduled in a variable game, when specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of the ready-to-win performance, presentation of the past specific information plays a role as an advance notice performance for execution of the specific ready-to-win performance, so interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable to execute the presentation of the past specific information in the variable game as an expectation degree suggesting performance (including a confirmed performance indicating that it is a big win) that suggests the expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, or as a chance-up performance to improve the expectation (reliability). Also in this case, interest in the variation game is improved. In addition, when the specific information presented in the past is presented by the lottery executed at the specific timing of the variable game or the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at the random specific timing determined by the game machine 10, so that the unexpectedness of the game can be particularly imparted. Also, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, so that the interest in the game is improved.

On the other hand, when the past specific information is presented at the player's will during the special period, the player can positively confirm the past specific information at his/her favorite timing during the special period without passively waiting for the past specific information to be presented at the timing determined by the game machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, when specifying or estimating a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past specified information, convenience is improved because the player's own intention is reflected without being restricted by the game machine 10 with respect to the timing of presenting the past specified information.

Here, as an example of presenting the past specific information in the special period according to the intention of the player, the specific information presented in the past is presented when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the like in the special period set during the standby state, during the variable game, or during the jackpot game.

In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed in the ending (specified period) of the jackpot game, and all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed in the last three endings of the jackpot game is displayed in the pattern display unit 341 by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21 in the standby state period (special period). In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without performing input operations such as passwords and commands.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11 .

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts the player's pressing operation in the standby state described later and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) of the symbol display unit 341 . The selection decision unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision buttons 21B.

A plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the waiting state screen transition processing of FIGS. Here, provisional selection means a state in which the content of the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d for switching input signals to the sound lamp control device 5, as shown in FIG. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5 . Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated, it is determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 are being operated continuously or have been completed.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Also, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts the player's operations on the touch keys may be provided as operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the pattern display section 341 for accepting player's operations. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Also, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches or the like, but may be piezoelectric elements or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player.

Here, FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment, operation detection processing (step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B have been operated. Here, FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), an enter button operation detection process (step S2805), and an enter operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the game machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that whether or not the operation button 20 is operated is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Also, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are stored in the RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2802 in the operation detection processing, an operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38A). Also, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38A). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38A). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 38A). Here, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 59A is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation states for the operation button 20. FIG. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), shifts the process to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3008 when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No).

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A) when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued, and therefore can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. Therefore, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 is long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated, it is possible to execute the operation button presentation based on the long-press operation.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not ON (step S3001: No), it determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is ON (step S3005). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3006: No), shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A), and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected, so that the erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at the timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3009 when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No).

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A) when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the three operation states of the operation button 20 (see FIG. 59A). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes upper selection button operation processing, lower selection button operation processing, left selection button operation processing, and right selection button operation processing.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG. 57, the operation detection flag of the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG. 57 may be read as the operation detection flag of the operation button.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes up selection operation detection pattern determination process, down selection operation detection pattern determination process, left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the upper selection button 211 from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” can be read as “up selection operation detection flag” and “up selection operation pattern flag”, respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started).

Further, when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a bottom operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 from the operation history of the bottom selection button 212 determined based on the first bottom selection operation detection flag, the second bottom selection operation detection flag, and the bottom selection operation detection flag. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” can be read as “lower selection operation detection flag” and “lower selection operation pattern flag”, respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first bottom selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

In addition, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated).

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third bottom selection operation detection flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” can be read as “left selection operation detection flag” and “left selection operation pattern flag”, respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF when an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the left selection button 213 has been operated).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the left selection button 213 has been operated).

In addition, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above, such as ``OFF'', ``OFF'', and ``OFF'', occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process can be performed by replacing the "operation detection flag" with the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" with the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E) , in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the right selection button 214 has been operated).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to off when an operation pattern other than the above such as ``OFF'', ``OFF'', and ``OFF'' occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the enter button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "enter button operation detection flag".

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58 may be replaced with the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first enter operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second enter operation pattern flag and the third enter operation pattern flag to OFF when an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. Then, the first decision operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B is being operated continuously.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated).

Further, when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first enter operation pattern flag and the second enter operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated).

In addition, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the enter button 21B is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Waiting state screen transition processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition processing executed in 2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing, in the standby state where neither the variable game nor the big win game is executed, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 is shifted in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the determination button 21B, and processing that allows the player to make various selections and settings is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pattern display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the variable display of decorative patterns is stopped, the reserved number N and the reserved number M are '0', and the game is not shifted to a big win game state, the fluctuation stop screen in which the fluctuation of the decorative patterns is stopped is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and cursor images.

The plurality of screen transition images are images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transition destination). The plurality of screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to the 7-segment display history selection screen displaying "7-segment display history", a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the character selection screen displaying "character selection", a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen displaying "character customization", and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displaying "return".

The cursor image is an image indicating which of a plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the plurality of screen transition images is the temporarily selected item. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that "7-segment display history" is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the other screen transition images in order to emphasize that the item is temporarily selected. Note that the temporary selection item can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 .

On the top menu screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the determination button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and operates the decision button 21B, the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the content of the specific information displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the three most recent predetermined periods, and includes a previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the previous predetermined period, a second previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the second predetermined period, and a third previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the three previous predetermined periods. Each history screen includes a history image in the same form as the additional images (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C)) displayed on the symbol display portion 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game. The history image indicates the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes 5 set value suggestive images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 60, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, and then the segments A to C are lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating that the temporary selection is made, a transition image to the previous history screen displaying "History 1 (1 time before)" for transitioning to the previous history screen displaying "History 2 (2 times before)", a transition image to the 2nd previous history screen for transitioning to the 2nd previous history screen displaying "History 2 (2nd time before)", a 3rd previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the 3rd previous history screen displaying "History 3 (3rd time before)", and a fluctuation stop screen displaying "End". Includes a floating still screen transition image for transitioning. Then, on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the game player temporarily selects the previous history screen transition image of ``history 1 (1 time before)'', when the enter button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display part history selection screen to the previous history screen. When "history 2 (2 times before)" is selected, the history selection screen of the 7-segment display part is shifted to the history screen of 2 times before, and when "history 3 (3 times before)" is selected, the history selection screen of the 7-segment display part is shifted to the history screen of 3 times before. When "end" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is switched to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to switch from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any one of the 1st previous history screen, the 2nd previous history screen, and the 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the history information desired by the player by shifting to the history screen desired by the player. As a result, the history can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of history information such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the history can be efficiently confirmed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, information for specifying the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 different from the pattern display section 341 in which decorative patterns are variably displayed. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, visual recognition of the image effect executed in the pattern display section 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, the same history information as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending is displayed on the pattern display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39 . Here, since the pattern display portion 341 generally has a large display area, displaying the history information on the pattern display portion 341 improves the visibility of the history information. Also, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, if the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending are displayed on the pattern display part 341, the history information can be confirmed by the same operation as the operation for performing various settings, so that the convenience of the confirmation work of the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also conceivable to display a plurality of pieces of history information simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, it is possible to efficiently check the presentation contents in this case as well.

Also, in the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of ``character selection'' is selected, the display screen is transitioned to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of ``character customization'' is selected, the display screen is transitioned to the character customization screen. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the character's costume, accessories, hairstyle, and the like.

In the top menu screen, when the change stop screen transition image of "return" is selected, the display screen shifts to the change stop screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) in the standby state, it is possible to check the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods. Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, thereby improving convenience for specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values).

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 61 and 62, the procedure of the waiting state screen transition processing executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55 will be described.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the waiting state screen transition processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the device is in the waiting state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to OFF during the variable game effect flag set to ON at step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 (step S3101: No), and when the flag during the jackpot game effect set to ON when the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. I judge. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that it is not in a standby state when the variable game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the MPU 51 is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the process proceeds to step S3103, and if it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the pattern display section 341 is the fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 to be described later when shifting from the fluctuation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is shifted to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set when the display screen shifts from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in FIG. It is also set to ON when the display screen shifts from the previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen. Incidentally, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started.

Then, when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3104, and when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the process shifts to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the operation button 20 is operated while the display screen is the variable display screen, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), sets off the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3107), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing.

<Step S3108>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to on (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109 if the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3110 if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No).

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, an item to be provisionally selected is changed according to the operation of the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, when the enter button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted to the screen corresponding to the temporarily selected item, specifically, the change stop screen, the 7-segment display history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character customization screen. Further, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transition destination screen to ON while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3112>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, when the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and when the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the process shifts to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 turns off the previous history screen flag and turns on the 7-segment history selection screen flag.

<Step S3114>
When the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3114). The 2-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2-time previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115 when the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3116 when the second previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No).

<Step S3115>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2nd previous history screen process and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 2nd previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 2nd previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON (step S3116). The 6-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3-time previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3118 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No).

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process, and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
When the history screen flag three times before is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. That is, when all the screen flags are off in the standby state, the MPU 51 shifts from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state and can determine that the display screen is the variable stop screen, so it sets the variable stop screen flag to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the previous history screen, or the previous history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection determination section 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and is set to ON in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202 when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3203 when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No).

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs processing to move the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time before)" (see FIG. 60). If the upper selection button 211 is operated while "history 1 (one time before)" displayed at the top of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the temporary selection display may be changed to "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation of the upper selection button 211 has not started, the MPU 51 determines whether the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second bottom selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the bottom selection button 212 has been operated, and is set to ON in the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204 when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3205 when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No).

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing to change the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times before)" (see FIG. 60). If the lower selection button 212 is operated while "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the temporary selection display may be changed to "history 1 (previous)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second bottom selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second enter operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the enter button 21B has been operated, and is set to ON in the enter button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the determination button 21B is operated is "end" (step S3207). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208 if the provisionally selected item is "end" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), and transfers the process to step S3210 if the provisionally selected item is not "end" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: No).

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is "end" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "end" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211 if the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (1st previous)" (step S3210: Yes), and transfers the process to step S3213 if the provisionally selected item is not "history 1 (1st previous)" (step S3210: No).

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to ON (step S3212), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "History 1 (1 time ago)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is “history 2 (2 times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not “history 2 (2 times before)” (step S3213: No), the process proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "history 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to ON (step S3215), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the item provisionally selected is "History 3 (3rd time ago)". 7) End the 7-segment history selection screen process.

In this way, on the 7 -segment history screen executed in the waiting state, the display screen shifted to either the history screen, twice a pre -history screen, and the pre -history screen twice from the 7 -segmented display site history selection screen, and entered the special out balls 373 of the croon device 37 for the prescribed period of the past three times. All or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non -set values displayed in the 7 -segment display portion 39 according to the number of gaming ball 99 can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, thereby improving convenience for specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, the display screen is not shifted to another screen such as a change stop screen from the history screen (1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen and 3rd previous history screen) except when the player intentionally performs a screen transfer operation. Therefore, the player can carefully and politely check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the past at his/her own pace by stopping the launching of the game ball 99 and maintaining a standby state without being subject to time restrictions such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, when a player specifies or guesses a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on past specified information, the player can consider them at his or her own pace, thereby improving the convenience of specifying or guessing a plurality of non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the operation (intention) of the player in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to check specific information for a predetermined period of one, two, four or more times in the past.

Further, the display of past specific information is not limited to the pattern display section 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or may be a display unit different from the pattern display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, a separate display unit for displaying the past specific information. In addition, when there is a display section provided for executing a part of effects such as variable game effects separately from the symbol display part 341, it is conceivable to display past information on the display part.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to third embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that satisfies a specific condition during a specific period, all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated when the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the specific information is displayed during the specified period set after the specified period elapses each time the specified period set as the specified period elapses.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers (non-set values) to be displayed can be specified. Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When the segment B which is the second object to be controlled is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6". Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment E, which is the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G become the objects of control, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the numbers to be displayed next is not started until after all the segments A to G become the objects of control. Therefore, even when the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 before all the segments A to G become control objects, the information for specifying the numbers already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until the next display of the numbers to be displayed starts. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and there is concern that the player's interest in the game may decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values are dispensed every time the specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed during the specific period that has passed earlier, it is assumed that the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or guess the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in non-set value display means (lamp display units) having a plurality of information display units (six individual lamp units) that are equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), information (numbers) specifying non-set values is displayed by each information display unit. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighting state) in which specific information is presented and a non-display state (light-out state) in which the specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. By thus setting the information display section to one of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display section in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, as the specific information, only information that allows the non-set value to be specified is displayed, and information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not displayed. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The non-set value display means is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a display device having a plurality of groups of lamps that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, a plasma display, and the like. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means for displaying the decoration pattern in a variable manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display parts corresponding to the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in the predetermined period is put into the display state, and at least the information display parts put into the display state earlier in the specific period are put into the display state until the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set is finished. For example, the information display portion that was put into the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also put into the display state during the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display part that was put in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also put in the display state during the specific period after the predetermined period, so that the information can be confirmed at any time during at least the specific period during the predetermined period. Therefore, the specified information displayed in the previous specified period in the same specified period is not forgotten, and the convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specified information, and further when specifying or estimating the set value.

The information display part put in the display state during the specific period may be maintained in the display state all the time until the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set until the jackpot game is completed, may be maintained in the display state only during the jackpot game, or may be maintained in the display state only for the specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display part having six individual lamp parts to which any number from 1 to 6 is attached, a lamp lighting lottery executed when a game ball is entered into a special out ball opening of a crew device during a specific period is won, so that the individual lamp part to which a number corresponding to a non-set value is attached is turned on at the stage when the lamp lighting lottery is won without waiting for the lapse of the specific period. In the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modifications of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 64, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out-ball discharge section 38A instead of the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment.

The special out ball discharge section 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 to the back side of the game board 31 . This special out ball discharge section 38A has a configuration in which the stopper section 383 is omitted from the game ball retention section 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention section 38 except that the stopper section 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge section 38A, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying (stopped) in the special out ball discharge section 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the specific period elapses as in the first embodiment, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information specifying non-set values, and includes a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in rows (linearly) in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 65 , the lamp display section 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 . Accordingly, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 can be turned on and off individually.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp part 351, and when the first individual lamp part 351 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 1, and the game set value 1 is negated as the set value. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp part 352, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2 by turning on the second individual lamp part 352, and the game set value 2 is negated as the set value. A number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp part 353, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3 by turning on the third individual lamp part 353, and the game set value 3 is negated as the set value. A number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp part 354, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4 by turning on the fourth individual lamp part 354, and the game set value 4 is negated as the set value. A number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp part 355, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5 by turning on the fifth individual lamp part 355, and the game set value 5 is negated as the set value. A numeral 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp part 356, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 6 by turning on the sixth individual lamp part 356, and the game set value 6 is negated as the set value.

That is, in the lamp display section 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set values corresponding to the numbers are negated as set values. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to the one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 in the off state corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 2 to 6 and the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are lit and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1 and 3 to 6, and the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are lit and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth and sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 353, 355 and 356 are lit and only the fourth individual lamp portion 354 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5 and 6 and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 354 and 356 are lit and only the fifth individual lamp section 355 is extinguished, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is specified to be 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is extinguished, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is specified to be 6. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are controlled in the set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Set value suggestion process]
In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control for lighting and extinguishing the lamp display unit 35 (the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the set value suggesting process executed in the secondary timer interrupt process of FIG. In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control for lighting and extinguishing the lamp display unit 35 (the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The procedure for setting value suggestion processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the process shifts to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out-ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and if the special out-ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), ends the setting value suggesting process.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp parts 351 to 356. That is, each time the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are to be lit.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is finished. In the 7-segment display unit 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control 7 segments A to G 5 times each, so a specific condition must be satisfied 35 times (7×5 times) or more. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes of lighting and turning off. Therefore, in order to display five non-set values by the lamp display unit 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition needs to be satisfied five times or more. Moreover, in this embodiment, a crew device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment is employed. Therefore, if the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the non-set values will be lit with a small number of big wins.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the lamp lighting lottery is won. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the degree of difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display part 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily identified, that is, the set values are prevented from being easily recognized.

The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the degree of difficulty for controlling lighting of the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356 is the same or substantially the same as the degree of difficulty for displaying five numbers by the 7-segment display portion 39 in the first embodiment. The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or the winning probability for at least one individual lamp part 351 to 356 may be different from the other individual lamp parts 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356, a game feature is imparted in which the probability of lighting the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values is stabilized. When the same winning probability is set for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). This is because, in the above-described first embodiment, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, so that in this embodiment also, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373, about one individual lamp part 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, when the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the lottery condition that triggers the execution of the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the difficulty of establishment of this lottery condition. That is, when the degree of difficulty in establishing the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set low, and the higher the difficulty in establishing the lottery condition, the higher the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be set. Thus, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the degree of difficulty of establishment of the lottery condition, the degree of difficulty of establishment of a specific condition necessary for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of the specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (exactly as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 is made different from that of the other individual lamp portions 351 to 356, the probability of lighting the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values varies. When the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 having a later control order may be set to have a lower winning probability. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having the earliest control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the set value processing ends.

<Step S3305>
If the lottery for lighting the lamp is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the already lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already lit lamp information is information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are being lit, and includes already lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The lit lamp flag information includes a first lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, a second lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, a third lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp section 355 is lit. , and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, all lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are extinguished. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to OFF, indicating that the second individual lamp section 352 is lit and the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are extinguished.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying non-set values are lit. Then, when all the lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggesting process. That is, when the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying the non-set value are all turned on, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on, so the set value suggesting process ends. On the other hand, if there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by a procedure similar to the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the set values stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the set values are changed. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display order determination table can be considered as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the setting value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is the second individual lamp unit 352→third individual lamp unit 353→fourth individual lamp unit 354→fifth individual lamp unit 355→sixth individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the numerical display order determination table of the first embodiment, the probability of selecting each display order is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table of the present embodiment, the probability of selecting each lamp control order is also the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period of time starts. Also, the lamp control orders need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time a game ball 99 enters a special out ball opening 373 of a crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already lit lamp information (step S3310), and terminates the set value suggesting process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit, whereby the non-set value can be specified. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be identified by turning on the individual lamps 351 to 356 even before the specific period elapses. By setting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in one of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state in this manner, the non-set value can be specified by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

<Step S3311>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is OFF (step S3311: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type to end is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the set value suggesting process ends.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51, if there are individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are lit among the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, turns off the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 (step S3313), clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the set value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are extinguished when the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are kept lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on at any time until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, that is, the specific information specifying the non-set value. Therefore, the specified information previously presented in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specified information, and further when specifying or estimating the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is won, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value in the lamp display part 35 are turned on. However, it is optional to perform the lamp lighting lottery. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the value may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is divided into a route detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 that present the non-set values are set to either of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state, and information specifying the non-set values is presented according to the type (number) of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are in the lit state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The lighted individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are immediately lighted by winning a lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and the lighted individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are maintained in the lighting state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information specifying the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and when specifying or estimating the set value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the lamp lighting lottery is won. As a result, the degree of difficulty in meeting the specific condition is adjusted according to the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the degree of difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356 displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display portion 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily identified, that is, the set values are prevented from being easily recognized.

The lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball 373 of the crew device 37 is immediately lit up, but the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be indicated to the player on display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly indicated to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37), the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly indicated to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. It is clearly shown in the pattern display section 341 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 may be lit. That is, an image for drawing attention to the lamp display portion 35 (roulette) is displayed. In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) by the symbol display unit 341, even if the player overlooks that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373, the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 also indicates that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373, that is, the individual lamps 351 to 356 may be lit. can grasp.

Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69(B1), information regarding the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 to be turned on is clearly displayed. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp portion 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display part 341, not only the lamp display part 35 but also the pattern display part 341 can grasp whether the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit or not, so that the convenience is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 being lit is continuously displayed during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening/closing execution mode). That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the individual lamp portion 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display portion 341 . It should be noted that, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the open/close execution mode), information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit may be displayed.

On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, an image is displayed clearly indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, as shown in FIG. 69(B1). In this way, the pattern display part 341 continuously displays the information about the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 that are lit during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), so that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 that are lit can be confirmed even in the pattern display part 341 without confirming the lamp display part 35, thereby improving the convenience.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display section 341 instead of the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the pattern display section 341 . In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect in the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an additional ending image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending effect of the jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of the jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display portion 35 is displayed in the symbol display portion 341 as the ending additional image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. In this way, by displaying the lit/unlit state of the lamp display part 35 by the pattern display part 341 at the ending of the big win game, the lit/unlit states of the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 lit up to the big win game can be confirmed, thereby improving the convenience.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp display portion 35 in which the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linearly) is employed, but the lamp display portion 35 is not limited to the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other forms may be employed. For example, a lamp display portion 35 in which individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), and a lamp display portion 35 in which individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. Further, the lamp display portion 35 may be one in which the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, or the like may be employed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot), and the number that satisfies the specific condition (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within the specific period) is set, A case has been described where all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is a game machine in which the lottery result of a jackpot lottery is notified by a game effect executed on an image display device such as a liquid crystal display. The game performance includes, for example, a high-speed fluctuation display performance in which decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed, a normal reach performance, a super ready-to-win performance, a special ready-to-win performance, etc., and the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be a big win (big hit expectation) increases in the order of the special reach performance, the super ready-to-reach performance, the normal reach performance, and the high-speed fluctuation display performance. A special ready-to-win production with a high expectation of a big hit may include a production in which a specific character is the main character (main character), for example, a production in which a specific character (main character) battles an enemy character.

In addition, when the decoration pattern is variably displayed at a high speed, stage production is generally performed behind the decoration pattern (lower layer). This stage performance is a performance executed in a stage having a main theme of a specific place, a specific situation, a specific character, etc., and when the variation game is repeated, a shift is made between a plurality of set stages, and the stage performance corresponding to each stage is executed.

Here, since the special ready-to-win performance is a performance with a high expectation for a big win, when the special ready-to-win performance is executed, if the special ready-to-win performance notifies that the lottery result is out, the shock and disappointment are great. Therefore, when the special ready-to-reach effect in which a specific character is the subject (main character) fails, the player may have an unpleasant feeling such as disgust towards the specific character. On the other hand, conventionally, transitions between stages (stage changes) are performed at random. For example, transition between stages (stage change) is performed based on the result of a transition lottery at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the stage production of the specific character may be executed in the next variable game after the special ready-to-win production of the specific character is executed. In this case, it is assumed that the player's disgust and displeasure with respect to the specific character will increase, and the interest in the game may decrease. In addition, when the transition between stages is performed at random, a special ready-to-reach performance that the specific character stays in the stage of the specific character is executed, and furthermore, the stage of the specific character is continuously stayed in the next variable game. In that case, it is assumed that the player's sense of disgust and displeasure with respect to the specific character will further increase, and the interest in the game may further decrease.

In addition, the special ready-to-reach performance of a specific character may be executed as a life-or-death battle between the specific character and the enemy character, and in the next variable game after the special ready-to-reach performance is executed after the specific character is defeated by the enemy character, if the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is immediately executed, it is assumed that the player feels a sense of incongruity, and the interest in the game may decrease in this case as well. In addition, when the transition between stages is performed at random, a special ready-to-reach performance that the specific character stays in the stage of the specific character is executed, and furthermore, the stage of the specific character is continuously stayed in the next variable game. In that case, it is assumed that the player will feel a greater sense of discomfort, and the interest in the game may further decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined specific performance out of a plurality of specific performances expressing or suggesting a degree of expectation for a big win is executed in the variable game in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result, a mode image performance different from the mode image performance executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image performances is executed in the pattern display part after a prescribed period of execution of the predetermined specific performance.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game in which the predetermined specific performance is executed is a predetermined result, a mode image performance different from the mode image performance executed in the variable game among a plurality of mode image performances is executed after a prescribed period of execution of the prescribed specific performance. That is, when the predetermined specific effect is executed, the mode image effect executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the predetermined specific effect. In this way, when the prescribed specific performance is executed, the mode image performance executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, so that the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the mode image performance executed in the variation game after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, and the decline in interest in the game is restrained.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined specific performance is, for example, a battle performance in which the character is on the verge of life and death, the mode image performance of the defeated (dead) character is not immediately executed, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the flow of a series of performances from the end of the predetermined specific performance to the next variable game, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

Predetermined specific effects include, for example, a special ready-to-win effect and a super ready-to-win effect. Further, a specific character special ready-to-reach production centered on a specific character among a plurality of characters and a specific character super ready-to-reach production centering on a specific character are conceivable, and typically, a specific character special ready-to-reach production is conceivable.

Further, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result, the predetermined result may be either a loss or a big win, but is typically a loss. When the predetermined result is out, the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting the type of mode image effect executed in the variable game or the execution of the predetermined specific effect in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will forget that the effect mode has been entered, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

For example, the variation game and the variation game to be performed after the variation game can be considered as the predetermined period after the predetermined specific effect is performed. Further, as the variable game to be executed after the variable game, for example, a variable game for holding the right to execute the variable game at the start of the variable game can be considered, and typically, a variable game to be executed next to the variable game can be considered. Then, after the predetermined period of time, typically, the start time of the variation game to be executed next to the variation game can be considered.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, in the next variation game after the execution of the special ready-to-win production of the specific character, the stage production of a character other than the specific character is executed. In this way, in the next variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, the stage performance of the character other than the specific character is executed, thereby avoiding the stage performance of the specific character in the next variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the stage performance of the specified character in the next variation game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, even if the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance in which the specific character is life-or-death, the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next variation game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the variable game next to the special ready-to-win performance, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when a special ready-to-win performance of a specific character is executed, if a predetermined condition is met, for example, if the holding of the right to execute a variable game includes a suspension of execution of a performance with a high expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win (big win expectation), the stage performance of the specific character is executed in the next variable game. In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the stage performance of the specific character is executed even when the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is exceptionally executed, so that the occurrence of the exception leads to development in the progress of the game that is advantageous to the player, for example, the execution of the performance with high expectation for the big win in the variable game against the reservation of the right to execute the variable game.

Here, as the predetermined condition, for example, the first suspension or second suspension for the first special figure or the second special figure at the start of the variable game in which the specific character's loss special ready-to-win performance is executed includes the suspension for executing the predetermined variable game. In other words, the exception that the stage performance of the specified character is executed even when the special ready-to-win performance of the specified character is executed is used as a look-ahead performance of the first suspension or the second suspension for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, when an exception (contradiction) occurs in which the stage performance of the specified character is executed in the next variable game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, the player can understand that the predetermined variable game is executed in the pending variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating the occurrence of a predetermined variable game when an exception (contradiction) occurs in the stage presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Predetermined variable games include, for example, a variable game that informs that the lottery result of a jackpot lottery is a big win, a variable game that executes a super ready-to-win effect, and a variable game that executes a special ready-to-win effect. Thus, when an exception occurs in which the stage performance of the specified character is executed in the next variable game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, the player can understand that any one of the variable game informing the jackpot, the variable game to execute the super ready-to-win performance, and the variable game to execute the special ready-to-win performance will be executed. Also, the super ready-to-win effect and the special ready-to-win effect are effects with a high degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, when an exception (contradiction) occurs in the stage presentation, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to be notified that the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Processing of main controller 4]
First, with reference to FIG. 72, the difference between the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 and the above-described first embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, part of the data setting process is different from the data setting process of the first embodiment.

[Data setting process]
The data setting process of this embodiment differs from that of the above-described first embodiment in the process of setting a shift command. Here, FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 41 executes the same processing as in the above-described first embodiment when executing a variable game for holding the first special figure (steps S1502 to S1504). Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), moves the validity information from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503), and shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Subsequently, the MPU 41 sets the first pending shift command (step S3401), and terminates the data setting process.

Here, the first reservation shift command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the success/failure information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted when the number N of reservations of the first special figure is reduced.

<Step S3402>
MPU41, when executing the variation game for the hold of the second special figure, executes the same processing as in the first embodiment described above (steps S1505 to S1507). Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), moves the correctness information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506), and shifts the correctness information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 by one (step S1507). Subsequently, the MPU 41 sets a second pending shift command (step S3402), and terminates the data setting process.

Here, the second reservation shift command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the success/failure information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted when the reservation number M of the second special figure is reduced.

The first pending shift command and the second pending shift command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the first pending shift command or the second pending shift command, the holding information storage area 53 set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (see FIG. 73). Executes processing for updating the contents of the first holding information storage area 53A or the second holding information storage area 53B (step S3506 or S3508 of the command determination processing in FIG. 83).

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 88, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with respect to differences from the first embodiment described above. In this embodiment, the command determination process, effect pattern setting process, and decoration pattern combination setting process are different from the data setting process of the first embodiment.

[Holding information storage area]
Here, FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an example of the hold information storage area 53 set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, the pending information storage area 53 includes a first pending information storage area 53A and a second pending information storage area 53B.

The first reservation information storage area 53A includes a first reservation area 53A1, a second reservation area 53A2, a third reservation area 53A3, a fourth reservation area 53A4, and a first reservation number storage area 53AN. In the first reservation area 53A1, the second reservation area 53A2, the third reservation area 53A3, and the fourth reservation area 53A4, information on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the reservation of the first special figure and information on the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) of the first special figure are stored. There is. In the first reservation number storage area 53AN, the number (reservation number N) of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the correctness information is stored is stored, and the storage content is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4.

In addition, the stored contents of the first hold information storage area 53A are updated when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the first hold command or the first hold shift command transmitted from the main controller 4 (steps S3502 and S3506 of the command determination processing in FIG. 83).

The second reservation information storage area 53B includes a first reservation area 53B1, a second reservation area 53B2, a third reservation area 53B3, a fourth reservation area 53B4, and a second reservation number storage area 53BM. In the first reservation area 53B1, the second reservation area 53B2, the third reservation area 53B3, and the fourth reservation area 53B4, information on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the reservation of the second special figure and information on the variation display time (variation pattern) of the second special figure are stored. There is. In the second reservation number storage area 53BM, the number (reservation number M) of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 in which the correctness information is stored is stored, and the storage content is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. It is the same as the content stored in the reservation number storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB.

In addition, the stored contents of the second hold information storage area 53B are updated when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the second hold command or the second hold shift command transmitted from the main controller 4 (steps S3504 and S3508 of the command determination processing in FIG. 83).

Then, in this embodiment, the MPU 51 refers to the pending information storage area 53, so that it is possible to execute a so-called look-ahead effect in which the winning/failing information stored in the pending is suggested or specified. Further, in the present embodiment, a stage transition (stage change) is executed as described later, and this stage transition (stage change) is used for the look-ahead effect. That is, in the present embodiment, unlike the prior art, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery notified by the variable game (contents of the variable game effect (variable display time)) and the result of the win-or-fail determination by look-ahead are used as a trigger for the stage transition (stage change). Details of the stage transition (stage change) and the look-ahead effect will be described later.

[Decorative pattern]
Here, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a plurality of ornamental symbols that are variably displayed and stop-displayed in the symbol display section 314 in the variable game. As shown in FIG. 74, the plurality of decorative patterns are predetermined patterns with numbers "1" to "9". Specifically, the plurality of decorative patterns are: a decorative pattern 1 in which the number "1" is attached to the "Sam"pattern; a decorative pattern 2 in which the number "2" is attached to the "dugong"pattern; a decorative pattern 3 in which the "warin" pattern is attached with the number "3"; a decorative pattern 4 in which the "shrimp" pattern is attached with the number "4"; A decorative pattern 6 with a number '6' attached, a decorative pattern 7 with a 'marine' pattern with a number '7' attached, a decorative pattern 8 with a 'tortoise' pattern with a number '8' attached, and a 'whale lucky' pattern with a number '9' attached.

In the present embodiment, when the variable game is terminated, three decorative patterns are stop-displayed on the active line in the pattern display part 314, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is informed by the three stop-displayed combinations of the decorative patterns. Specifically, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the combination of the same decorative patterns (doubles) is stop-displayed, and when the lottery result of the big-wins lottery is a loss, the combination of the decorative patterns other than the doubles (losing) is stop-displayed.

The outliers include, for example, reach stitches in which the first and second stop-displayed decoration patterns are the same and the last stop-displayed decoration pattern is different from other decoration patterns, and loose stitches in which the first stop-displayed decoration pattern and the second stop-displayed decoration pattern are different. And, in this embodiment, the loose eyes include a stage transition result, which will be described later, for notifying that a stage transition will occur in the next variation game. This stage transition result is a specific combination of symbols among the separated eyes, and the type of the combination may indicate or suggest the transition destination stage. The details of the stage transition result will be described later.

In addition, among the nine characters of the decorative patterns with numbers '1' to '9', the three characters 'Warin', 'Urin' and 'Marin' are specific characters who are the subjects (main characters) in the character stage among the stay stages in the stage production in the later-described variation game. That is, in this embodiment, three stages are set as the character stage: the warin stage, the warin stage, and the marine stage.

[Direction pattern]
Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device.

As shown in FIG. 75, the effect pattern type selection table of the present embodiment includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 75(A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super ready reach (see FIG. 75(B)), and a special ready reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 75(C)).

The normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 75(A) is a effect pattern type selection table used when the staying stage in the stage effect in the variable game is a normal stage or a character stage, which will be described later, and the variable display time is 30 seconds. The normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 75(A) is the same as the normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(A)) in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the stay stage in the stage production includes a normal stage and a character stage as described later. A character stage is a stage in which a stage effect is performed in which a specific character (in this embodiment, Warin, Urin, or Marin) is the main character (protagonist) (see FIG. 80(B) for an example of the Mari stage effect). On the other hand, the normal stage is a stage in which a stage production in which a specific character (Warin, Urin or Marin in this embodiment) is not the main character (for example, a production in which a plurality of characters appear and the main character is unclear) is executed (see FIG. 80(A) for an example of the normal stage production).

The normal reach effect pattern type selection table is used regardless of whether the stay stage in the stage effect is the normal stage or the character stage. That is, when the variable display time is 30 seconds (in the case of normal reach), the normal reach effect pattern is set using the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG.

The super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 75(B) is a effect pattern type selection table used when the stay stage in the stage effect is the normal stage and the variable display time is 60 seconds. Here, the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 75(B) is the same as the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(B)) in the first embodiment. That is, when the stay stage in the stage effect is the normal stage and the variable display time is 60 seconds, the super ready-to-win effect pattern is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As the super ready-to-win effect pattern, typically, an effect pattern that is executed in the order of high-speed fluctuation effect→normal ready-to-win effect→super ready-to-win effect can be considered. Of course, the super ready-to-win effect pattern may be a so-called shortcut super ready-to-win effect pattern in which at least one of the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal ready-to-win effect is omitted. For example, as the super ready-to-win effect pattern, a shortcut effect pattern in which the normal ready-to-win effect executed in the order of high-speed fluctuation effect->super ready-to-win effect is omitted can be considered. That is, the super ready-to-win effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the super ready-to-win effect is executed as the final individual effect type.

Also, after the normal ready-to-win effect ends, the SP development suggesting effect suggesting execution of the super ready-to-win effect may be executed, and when the SP development suggesting effect is successful, the super ready-to-win effect may be executed. In addition, in the normal reach production pattern, the final individual production ends with the normal reach production without developing into the super reach production by failing in the SP development suggestive production.

Here, FIG. 76A is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect pattern type and the final individual effect type.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the effect pattern Y1 among the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y5 is a super ready-to-win effect pattern whose final individual effect type is marine super ready-to-win effect (marine SP ready-to-win effect, specific SP ready-to-win effect 1 effect). The marine super reach production is a super reach production executed with marine as the main character (main character). This marine super reach production is, for example, a production of whether or not a mission such as mastering a special move to be used in a battle with an enemy character or a mission for confirming whether the special move has been mastered is achieved. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, the mission is achieved, and if the lottery result is a loss, the mission is not achieved.

Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a marine super ready-to-win effect as the final individual effect type in the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y1. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the marine super reach presentation is a mission presentation of destroying a large rock, and when the large rock is successfully destroyed, the lottery result is a big win, and when the large rock is unsuccessfully destroyed, the lottery result is lost. Specifically, in the Marine Super Reach production, an image showing the details of the mission is first displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 77(A)), and then an image of performing a special move on Oiwa is displayed (see FIG. 77(B)).

Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, an image that successfully destroys the large rock and an image that Marine is pleased with are displayed (see FIG. 77 (C1)), and then an image in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with double eyes is displayed (see FIG. 77 (D1)). In the state shown in FIG. 77(D1), a stage effect may be executed as a background effect behind the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, an image of failure to destroy the large rock and an image of Marin's disappointment are displayed (see FIG. 77 (C2)), followed by an image in which the decoration symbol is displayed in a stop state in a reach state (see FIG. 77 (D2)). In the state shown in FIG. 77(D2), a stage effect may be executed as a background effect behind the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Here, as a game machine, there is a game machine in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for a certain period of time in a pattern display part 341 to indicate that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is lost, and then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to clarify (determine) that the lottery result is lost. For example, in the pattern display part 341, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a state in which the decorative pattern slightly moves up and down due to misalignment, and after such a slight movement state has passed for a certain period, the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state due to misalignment. In such a game machine, for example, when the special ready-to-win performance pattern is set, the special ready-to-win performance develops after the lapse of the fixed period, and when the super ready-to-win performance pattern is set and the result of the lottery is a big win, the revival performance indicating the big win is executed after the lapse of the fixed period. In a game machine in which decoration patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed for a fixed period for development to a special ready-to-win performance or execution of a resurrection performance, a stage performance may be executed as a background performance behind the decoration patterns not only when the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed (determined stop) but also during a fixed period when the decoration patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed (undetermined stop).

In this way, the Marine Super Reach effect is not a life-and-death effect like the battle effect of the Marine Special Reach effect, which will be described later, and even if the mission fails, the Marine receives little or no damage. Therefore, even if the marine stage effect is immediately executed in the variable game next to the variable game in which the marine super ready-to-win effect is not performed, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the super reach production including the marine super reach production, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) that the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a big hit is lower than the special reach production. Therefore, when the super ready-to-win effect is missed, the degree to which the player feels unpleasant feelings such as disgust for the specific character is smaller than when the special ready-to-win effect is missed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 76A, the effect pattern Y2 of the super ready-to-win effect patterns is a super ready-to-win effect pattern whose final individual effect type is Urin super ready-to-win effect (Urin SP ready-to-win effect, specific SP ready-to-win effect 2 effect). The Urin Super Reach production is a Super Reach production executed with Urin as the subject (main character). This Urin Super Reach production is, for example, a production of whether or not a mission such as mastering a special move to be used in a battle with an enemy character, or a mission for confirming whether or not a special move has been mastered is achieved. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the mission is achieved, and if the lottery result is a loss, the mission is not achieved.

Effect pattern Y3 of the super ready-to-win effect patterns is a super ready-to-win effect pattern whose final individual effect type is warin super ready-to-win effect (warin SP ready-to-win effect, specific SP ready-to-win effect 3 effect). The Warin super reach production is a super reach production performed with Warin as the subject (main character). This Warin Super Reach production is, for example, a production of whether or not a mission such as mastering a special move to be used in a battle with an enemy character or a mission for confirming whether or not a special move has been mastered is achieved. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the mission is achieved, and if the lottery result is a loss, the mission is not achieved.

In addition, in the Urin super ready-to-win performance in the super ready-to-win performance pattern Y2 and the Warin super ready-to-win performance in the super ready-to-win performance pattern Y3, when these performances are executed as the mission performance, the mission performance similar to the marine super ready-to-win performance in the super ready-to-win performance pattern Y1 described with reference to FIG.

A performance pattern Y4 and a performance pattern Y5 out of the super ready-to-win performance patterns are a super ready-to-win performance in which the final individual performance type does not make a specific character the subject (main character), for example, a super ready-to-win performance in which a character other than the specific character is the main subject (main character).

In the special ready-to-win performance patterns Z1 to Z5 in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed as the final individual performance to be described later, when the super ready-to-win performance is executed before the special ready-to-win performance is executed, the super ready-to-win performance suggests that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost. For example, when the super ready-to-win effect is the mission effect, it is suggested that the mission is not achieved and the result of the lottery is lost, and then the special ready-to-win effect is executed.

Here, FIG. 76B is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table when a character stays on a stage.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), when the variable display time is 60 seconds and the stay stage in the stage presentation is the character stage, the presentation pattern corresponding to the character stage type is selected. Specifically, when the variable display time is 60 seconds and the stay stage is the marine stage, the final individual effect type is determined to be the marine super ready-to-win effect (marine SP ready-to-win effect). Further, when the variable display time is 60 seconds and the stay stage is the Urin stage, the final individual effect type is determined as the Urin super reach effect (Urin SP reach effect) effect pattern Y2. Further, when the variable display time is 60 seconds and the staying stage is the Warin stage, the final individual effect type is determined to be the Warin super ready-to-win effect (Warin SP ready-to-win effect) effect pattern Y3. That is, when staying in a character stage, the character super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the specific character in the stay stage is always executed as the super ready-to-win effect.

At least the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y1 to Y3 among the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y1 to Y5 may have different expectations (big win expectation levels) that the lottery results in the big win lottery will result in a big win.

Also, in this embodiment, the super ready-to-win performance of the specific character is common to the time of staying on the normal stage and the time of staying on the character stage.

Returning to the description of FIG. 75(C), the special reach effect pattern type selection table is a effect pattern type selection table used when the stay stage in the stage effect is the normal stage and the variable display time is 90 seconds. Here, the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 75(C) is the same as the special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(C)) in the above first embodiment. That is, when the stay stage in the stage effect is the normal stage and the variable display time is 90 seconds, the special ready-to-win effect pattern is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

As the special ready-to-win effect pattern, typically, an effect pattern that is executed in the order of high-speed fluctuation effect→normal ready-to-win effect→super ready-to-win effect→special ready-to-win effect can be considered. That is, as the special ready-to-win performance pattern, it is suggested that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost in the super ready-to-win performance, and after the end of the super ready-to-win performance, the special ready-to-win performance develops. Of course, the special ready-to-win effect pattern may be a so-called shortcut effect pattern in which at least one of the high-speed fluctuation effect, normal ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect is omitted. For example, as the special ready-to-win effect pattern, a shortcut effect pattern in which the super ready-to-win effect executed in the order of high-speed fluctuation effect→normal ready-to-reach effect→special ready-to-reach effect is omitted can be considered.

Also, after the super ready-to-win effect is finished, the SPSP development suggesting effect to suggest execution of the special ready-to-win effect may be executed, and when the SPSP development suggesting effect is successful, the special ready-to-win effect may be executed. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern, if the SPSP development suggestive effect fails, the final individual effect ends with the super ready-to-win effect without developing into the special ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76A, the performance pattern Z1 among the special ready-to-reach performance patterns Z1 to Z5 is a special ready-to-reach performance pattern whose final individual performance type is marine special ready-to-reach performance (marine SPSP ready-to-reach performance, specific SPSP ready-to-reach 1 performance). The marine special reach production is a special reach production executed with marine as the subject (main character). This Marine Special Reach production is, for example, a battle production in which Marine fights life or death with an enemy character, and Marine wins the battle when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, and Marine loses the battle when the lottery result is a loss.

Here, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a marine special ready-to-win effect as the final individual effect type in the special ready-to-win effect pattern Z1. In the example shown in FIG. 78, the marine special ready-to-win production is a battle production in which marine confronts an enemy character, and when marine wins the confrontation with the enemy character, it is clearly indicated that the lottery result is a big win, and when marine loses the confrontation with the enemy character, it is clearly indicated that the lottery result is lost. Specifically, in the marine special ready-to-win effect, first, an image indicating that a battle is about to start is displayed in the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 78(A)).

Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, an image in which Marine's attack hits the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 78(B1)), followed by an image showing that Marine has defeated the enemy character and an image that Marine is happy with (see FIG. 78(C1)), followed by an image in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with double eyes (see FIG. 78(D1)).

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loser, an image is displayed in which the enemy character's attack hits Marine (see FIG. 78(B2)), followed by an image showing that Marine has been defeated by the enemy character and an image in which Marine has fallen to the ground (see FIG. 78(C2)), and then an image in which the decoration pattern is stopped in a reach state (see FIG. 78(D2)).

Here, in a game machine in which the winning of the lottery is clearly indicated (confirmed) by stopping display of the decorative pattern after the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for a certain period of time in the pattern display part 341 as described above, and the winning of the lottery is clearly indicated (fixed) by stopping the display of the decorative pattern, for example, when the special ready-to-win performance pattern is set and the lottery result is the big win, the resurrection performance indicating the big win is executed after the lapse of the predetermined period. In a game machine in which decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed for a fixed period for execution of resurrection performance, stage performance may be executed as a background performance behind the decorative patterns not only when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed (determined stop) but also during a fixed period when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed (undetermined stop).

Returning to the description of FIG. 76A, the effect pattern Z2 of the special ready-to-win effect patterns is a special ready-to-win effect pattern whose final individual effect type is the Urin special ready-to-win effect (Urin SPSP ready-to-win effect, specific SPSP ready-to-win effect 2 effect). The Urin special reach production is a special reach production performed with Urin as the subject (main character). This Urin special reach production is, for example, a battle production in which Urin fights an enemy character for life and death, and Urin wins the battle when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, and Urin loses the battle when the lottery result is a loss.

The effect pattern Z3 among the special ready-to-win effect patterns is a special ready-to-win effect pattern whose final individual effect type is the Warin special ready-to-win effect (Warin SPSP ready-to-win effect, specific SPSP ready-to-win effect 3 effect). The Warin special reach production is a special reach production executed with Warin as the subject (main character). This Warin special reach performance is, for example, a battle performance in which Warin fights an enemy character for life and death, and Warin wins the battle when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, and Warin loses the battle when the lottery result is a loss.

In the Urin special ready-to-win performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern Z2 and the Warin special ready-to-win performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern Z3, when these performances are executed as the battle performance, the same battle performance as the marine special ready-to-win performance in the special ready-to-win performance pattern Z1 described with reference to FIG.

A performance pattern Z4 and a performance pattern Z5 of the special reach performance patterns are a special reach performance in which the final individual performance type is not based on a specific character (main character), for example, a special reach performance in which a character other than the specific character is the main body (main character).

Also, as shown in FIG. 76B, when the variable display time is 90 seconds and the stay stage in the stage production is the character stage, the production pattern corresponding to the character stage type is selected. Specifically, when the variable display time is 90 seconds and the stay stage is the marine stage, the final individual performance type is determined as the marine special ready-to-reach performance (marine SPSP ready-to-reach performance). Further, when the variable display time is 90 seconds and the stay stage is the Urin stage, the final individual effect type is determined to be the Urin special ready-to-win effect (Urin SPSP ready-to-win effect) effect pattern Z2. Further, when the variable display time is 90 seconds and the staying stage is the Warin stage, the final individual effect type is determined to be the marine special ready-to-win effect (Warin SPSP ready-to-win effect). That is, when staying in a character stage, a character special ready-to-win effect corresponding to the specific character in the stay stage is always executed as the special ready-to-reach effect.

At least the special ready-to-win performance patterns Z1 to Z3 out of the special ready-to-win performance patterns Z1 to Z5 may have different expectations (big win expectation) that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win.

Also, in this embodiment, the special reach performance of the specific character is common to the time of staying on the normal stage and the time of staying on the character stage.

[Stage and stage transition (stage change)]
Here, FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the stay stage in the stage presentation in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

In the present embodiment, the stage effect includes, for example, the above-described high-speed fluctuation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), behind (lower layer) the decoration pattern that fluctuates at high speed in the pattern display section 341, and is an effect that is executed in a predetermined number of variable games until the transition condition is satisfied. That is, the stage effect includes a background effect that is executed according to the stay stage type at least behind the decorative design when the decorative design changes at high speed. Further, in this embodiment, the basic performance includes a performance executed at least from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns until reaching the ready-to-win state, or a performance from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns to the end of normal ready-to-win. Further, in the present embodiment, the non-ready-to-win effect is an effect that is executed from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without entering the ready-to-win state. That is, the stage performance includes a performance executed at least from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns until reaching the ready-to-win state, the performance from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns to the end of the normal ready-to-win, and the performance executed from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns to the stop display of the decorative patterns without entering the ready-to-win state.

In addition, in the game machine described above, in which the winning of the lottery is clearly indicated (confirmed) by stopping the display of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for a certain period of time in the pattern display part 341 to indicate that the winning lottery result is lost, the stage production may be executed during the fixed period of time when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

Further, the stage effect may be executed in a non-game state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed. However, when displaying a so-called demo screen in a non-game state, the screen may be prioritized over the stage effect.

As shown in FIG. 79, the stay stage in the stage presentation in the normal game state includes a normal stage (group) and a character stage (group).

A normal stage is a stage in which a stage production in which a specific character (in this embodiment, Warin, Urin, or Marin) is not the subject (main character) (for example, a production in which a plurality of characters appear and the main character (main character) is unclear) is executed. In this embodiment, normal stages include a home stage, a school stage, and a town stage. In the home stage, for example, a stage production is performed with the motif of the daily life of a specific character at home with his family. In the school stage, for example, a stage production is performed with the motif of the daily life of a specific character with friends and teachers at school. In the town stage, a stage production is performed with the motif of a specific character's daily life with friends on the way to school or on the way home, for example.

Here, FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing an example of a stage effect on a downtown stage in a normal stage. Various effects are executed as the stage effect on the town stage, but the example of FIG. 80(A) is a stage effect depicting a state of enjoying a swimming pool in the town on the way home from school. In the stage production shown in FIG. 80(A), a character image of "Town Stage" indicating the staying stage is also displayed. It should be noted that whether or not to display an image showing the stay stage may be set as appropriate, and this point is the same for the stage effects in normal stages other than the downtown stage. Also, the name of the staying stage may be specified in the variable game where the stage transition is performed (for example, at the start of the variable game).

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the normal stage, stage transition (stage change) among the home stage, school stage, and town stage is executed. Specifically, in the normal stage, a stage transition from the home stage to the school stage or the town stage, a stage transition from the school stage to the home stage or the town center stage, and a stage transition from the town center stage to the home stage or the town center stage are executed. In this way, by executing the stage transition within the normal stage, it is possible to prevent the player from staying in the same stage for a long time in the normal stage, so that the player is restrained from feeling discomfort such as boredom due to staying in the same stage in the normal stage for a long time.

A stage transition within such a normal stage is executed when prescribed conditions are satisfied. The specified conditions include, for example, the execution of a specified number of variable games from the transition to the previous stage, the execution of a specified number of variable games from the end of the jackpot game, winning the lottery for the transition to another stage in the normal stage, the suspension of the other stage transition results in the normal stage, and the execution of a predetermined performance (except for the specified outlier ready-to-win performance). In this way, by executing the stage transition within the normal stage upon establishment of the specified condition, staying in the same stage within the normal stage for a long period of time is more reliably prevented, so that the player's feeling of discomfort such as boredom is suppressed more appropriately.

On the other hand, the character stage is a stage in which a stage production is performed in which a specific character (in this embodiment, Warin, Urin, or Marin) is the main character (main character). In this embodiment, the character stages include a Warin stage in which a stage production with Warin as the main character (protagonist) is executed, a Urin stage in which a stage production with Urin as the main character (protagonist) is executed, and a Warin stage in which a stage production with Marin as the main character (protagonist) is executed.

Here, FIG. 80(B) is a diagram showing an example of the stage effect in the marine stage in the character stage. As the stage effects on this marine stage, for example, various effects are executed in which marine images of various costumes and poses are displayed. The example of FIG. 80(B) is a stage production in which Marin is wearing a swimsuit. In the stage presentation shown in FIG. 80(A), a character image of "Marine Stage" indicating the staying stage is also displayed. It should be noted that whether or not to display an image indicating the stay stage may be set as appropriate, and this point is the same for stage effects in character stages other than the marine stage. Also, the name of the staying stage may be specified in the variable game where the stage transition is performed (for example, at the start of the variable game).

Note that in the character stage, stage transitions (stage changes) between the Warin stage, Urin stage, and Marine stage, that is, stage transitions within character stages are not executed in principle. However, in this embodiment, as an exception, a stage transition within a character stage is executed as a look-ahead effect. Details of this point will be described later.

In addition, characters corresponding to character stages are not limited to humans, and may be biological, geographical, locational, spatial, temporal, seasonal, or a combination thereof. For example, characters corresponding to character stages include real creatures such as animals and insects, virtual creatures, robots, vehicles such as cars, motorcycles, and bicycles, mountains, seas, rivers, lakes, swamps, amusement parks, game centers, campgrounds, morning, noon, evening, night, spring, summer, autumn, winter, and combinations of these.

Also, in this embodiment, the stay stage in the stage presentation in the normal game state is not limited to two stages (groups), and may include three or more stages (groups). Also, the normal stage (group) may include at least one (individual) stage. Also, a character stage (group) may include at least two (individual) stages. That is, in the present embodiment, at least two stage groups, a first stage group including two or more (individual) stages and a second stage group including one or more (individual) stages, may be included, and at least three (individual) stages may be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal stage is a stage related to the character such as the character's daily life, and the character stage is a stage mainly composed of the character.

<Transition to the stage when staying on the normal stage>
Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the present embodiment, the stage transition from the normal stage to the character stage in the normal game state is executed in the next variation game (see FIG. 81A) of the variation game in which the specified outlier reach effect (the specified character’s outlier super reach effect or the outlier special reach effect) is executed, or in the next variation game of the variable game in which the first specific condition described later is satisfied (see FIG. 81B). That is, the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage in the normal game state in the present embodiment is the execution of the specific out-of-reach ready-to-win effect and establishment of the first specific condition, and the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage is the next variation game of the variation game in which the stage transition opportunity occurs.

Of course, the stage transition opportunity from the normal stage to the character stage in the normal game state is not limited to specific out-of-specification reach or establishment of the first specific condition, and other triggers can be set. In addition, although the transition from the normal stage to the character stage in the normal game state will be described below, the transition mode described below can also be applied to the transition from the normal stage to the character stage in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage is not limited to the variation game executed next to the variation game in which the stage transition opportunity has occurred, but may be the variation game, or may be the variation game to be performed after the next round of the variation game. That is, the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage may be after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the stage transition opportunity was generated. In addition, when the stage transition from the normal stage to the character stage is performed, a stage transition announcement effect (change effect) indicating or suggesting that the stage transition will be performed may be executed immediately before the transition to the character stage. Details of the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage and the stage transition announcement effect will be described later.

Here, FIG. 81(A) is a diagram showing an example of transition to the character stage after the specific out-of-specification reach in the normal stage.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), when staying in the normal stage, when a specific character's losing super reach performance (losing Warin super reach performance (losing Warin SP reach performance), losing Urin super reach performance (losing Urin SP reach performance), or loosing marine super ready-to-win performance (losing Marine SP reach performance)) is executed, at the start of the variable game to be executed next to the variable game, the character stage of the character corresponding to the specific character (corresponding character) of the lost super reach performance (corresponding character) is performed. For example, when the warin-out super reach effect is executed when staying in the normal stage, the transition to the warin stage of the character stages occurs at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game. Further, when the Urin-out super reach performance is executed when staying in the normal stage, the shift to the Urin stage among the character stages occurs at the start of the variation game to be performed next to the variation game. When a marine out-of-marine super ready-to-win performance is executed when staying in a normal stage, a transition is made to a marine stage among character stages at the start of a variable game executed next to the variable game. That is, when a specific character's deviating super ready-to-win performance is executed when staying on the normal stage, the stage is shifted to the stage of the character corresponding to the specific character, and the stage of the character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character is not shifted.

Here, the super ready-to-win effect is a effect with a lower degree of expectation for a big win than the special ready-to-win effect, and is not executed as a battle effect in which a specific character is on the verge of life and death, unlike the special ready-to-win effect. Therefore, when the super ready-to-win performance notifies that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost, even if the variation game executed next to the variation game in which the winning ready-to-win performance is executed is shifted to the character stage of the specific character, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgust or discomfort with the specific character.

In addition, when a non-specified super ready-to-win performance (non-specified super ready-to-win performance) is executed when staying in the normal stage, the variable game executed next to the variable game stays in the normal stage (see FIG. 79). The normal stage to stay in this case may be the same as or different from the staying stage in the variable game in which the unspecified super reach effect is executed. Also, when the jackpot super ready-to-win effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the variation game (see FIG. 79).

Also, when the specific character's deviating super ready-to-win performance is executed when staying in the normal stage, in addition to or instead of shifting to the stage of the character corresponding to the specific character, the stage may be shifted to the stage of the character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character. In addition, when a plurality of stages are set as transition destinations in a variable game after execution of super ready-to-win performance of a specific character when staying in a normal stage, the degree of expectation for a big win during the suspension of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be indicated or suggested according to the stage type of the transition destination. That is, the stage transition (stage change) in the next variable game after the super reach performance may be used as the look-ahead performance.

On the other hand, in the case of staying in the normal stage, when the specific character's failure special reach performance (loss Warin special reach performance (loss Warin SPSP reach performance), failure Wrin special reach performance (failure Wrin SPSP reach performance), or failure marine special reach performance (failure Marine SPSP reach performance) is executed, at the start of the variable game to be executed next to the variable game, in principle, the character stage is shifted to the character stage of the character (non-corresponding character) different from the specified character. For example, when the losing warin special reach performance is executed when staying in the normal stage, in the variation game executed next to the variation game, in principle, the character stage (urin stage or marine stage) of the character (urin or marine) different from the specified character (warin) of the losing warin special reach performance is shifted. In addition, when the lose Urin special reach performance is executed when staying in the normal stage, in the variation game executed next to the variation game, in principle, the character stage (Warin stage or Marine stage) of the character (Warin or Marine) different from the specific character (Urin) of the lose Urin special reach performance is shifted. In the case that the non-marine special reach performance is executed while staying in the normal stage, in the variable game executed next to the variable game, as a rule, the character stage (Urin or Warin) different from the specified character (Marin) of the non-marine special reach performance is shifted to the character stage (Urin stage or Warin stage).

On the other hand, at the start of the variable game in which the specific character's loss special reach effect is executed, if the first hold for the first special pattern includes a specific hold (a jackpot hold in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (for example, a hold in which a jackpot special reach effect is executed in which the variable display time is 90 seconds) or a loss hold in which the variable display time is 90 seconds (a hold in which a loss special reach effect is executed)), at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game, the lost special reach. It shifts to the character stage corresponding to the specific character of production. For example, when the specified hold is included in the first hold for the first special figure at the start of the variation game in which the loss special reach performance of the specified character is executed, at the start of the variation game executed next to the variation game, if the specified character of the loss special reach performance is Warin, the stage is shifted to the Wrin stage, and if the specified character is Marine, the stage is shifted to the Marine stage.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player stays in the normal stage in the normal game state, the normal stage is shifted to the character stage when the specific character's loss special ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, the transition destination character stage is, in principle, a character stage of a character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character of the special ready-to-win effect. In this way, in the next variation game in which the loss special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character is executed, the stage performance of the specified character is avoided in the next variation game to which the loss special ready-to-reach performance is executed by shifting to a stage other than the specific character. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the stage performance of the specified character in the next variation game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, even if the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance in which the specific character is life-or-death, the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next variation game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the variable game next to the special ready-to-win performance, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Also, in this embodiment, as an exception, when there is a specific hold in the first hold for the first special figure, the character stage is shifted to the character stage of the character (corresponding character) determined according to the specific character type of the lost special reach production. Therefore, when staying in the normal stage, the specific character's special ready-to-win production is executed, and in the next variable game, when the character stage is shifted to the character stage of the specific character (corresponding character) in the special ready-to-win production in the next variable game, the first hold for the first special game at the start of the variable game in which the special ready-to-win production is executed. Confirm. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the execution of the variation game in which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win when the special character's loss special reach performance is executed when staying on the normal stage and the character stage of the specified character (corresponding character) in the loss special reach performance is executed in the next variable game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a suspension for executing a big win special ready-to-win performance with a variable display time of 90 seconds is set as a hold for a variable game informing a big win, a special ready-to-win performance of a specific character is executed as the big win special ready-to-win performance. That is, when the specific suspension is a suspension for a variable game informing a big win, the big win special ready-to-win performance of the same specified character (corresponding character) as the specified character of the previously executed loss special ready-to-win performance is executed (see FIG. 76(B)). Therefore, for example, when the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance with an enemy character, the enemy character whose specific character has been defeated in the previously executed losing special ready-to-win performance can be defeated by the big hit special ready-to-win performance to be executed thereafter. In this way, the player can get a sense of satisfaction from taking revenge on the enemy character who was defeated first, and can get a sense of revenge for the special reach performance itself by being notified of the big hit by the same special reach performance as the special reach performance that has lost earlier, so that the amusement of the game is improved in this respect as well.

In addition, when shifting to the character stage of the specified character (corresponding character) in the variation game executed next to the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specified character is executed, the special ready-to-win performance is always executed after that regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss. Therefore, even if the player feels uncomfortable due to the shift to the character stage of the specific character (corresponding character) in the variable game executed next to the variable game in which the special ready-to-reach performance is executed without the specific character, the player can understand the meaning of feeling uncomfortable by executing the special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character with high expectation for big win.

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, when the first specific condition is met during the normal stage stay in the normal game state, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the character stage at the start of the next variation game.

Examples of the first specific condition include, for example, that the number of variable games from the previous stage transition (including the stage transition within the normal stage and the stage transition from the character stage to the normal stage) reaches a specified number, that the number of variable games after the end of the jackpot game reaches a specified number, that the lottery for transition from the normal stage to the character stage is won, and that a predetermined effect (excluding the specified out-of-range ready-to-win effect) is executed. In this way, by shifting from the normal stage to the character stage when the first specific condition is satisfied, the character stage can be shifted even when the specific out-of-reach ready-to-reach performance (specific character's out-of-way super ready-to-reach performance or special ready-to-win performance) is not executed. Therefore, even if the execution frequency of the specific outlier ready-to-reach effect is low when the variable game effect is executed a large number of times, the game is shifted to the character stage. As a result, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as boredom due to staying in the normal stage for a long time or staying in the normal stage for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific symbol combination in the variation game in which the first specific condition is established. In this way, in the variation game in which the first specific condition is established, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the specific symbol combination, so that the specific symbol combination plays a role of the stage transition outcome. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest that the normal stage will be shifted to the character stage when the specific symbol combination (stage transition result) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the normal stage will be shifted to the character stage when the specific symbol combination (stage transition result) is stopped and displayed.

The specific symbol combination (stage transition result) is stopped and displayed, for example, when the jackpot lottery result in the variation game in which the first specific condition is established is completely out (non-reach out). As a result, when the ready-to-win performance including the specific out-of-reach ready-to-win performance is not executed, it is possible to stop and display the stage-shifting outcome, and to set the stage-transitioning outcome to the outcome other than the out-of-reach performance (unbalanced eye).

Also, the stage transition result may indicate or suggest the character stage type to which the transition is to be made. In this way, by specifying or suggesting the character stage type of the transition destination, the stage transition result indicates or suggests the type of the character stage of the transition destination, and when the stage transition result is stopped and displayed, not only the transition from the normal stage to the character stage but also the character stage of the transition destination can be grasped in advance.

Here, FIG. 81(B) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the stage transition outcome in the normal stage in the normal game state and the transition destination character stage.

As shown in FIG. 81(B), in the present embodiment, the stage transition outcome includes a Warin transition outcome, a Urin transition outcome, and a Marine transition outcome.

The warin transition outcome is a outcome that is stop-displayed when a normal stage stays in a normal game state, and is a outcome that indicates or suggests that the staying stage shifts to the warin stage at the start of the next variation game after the variation game in which the warin transition outcome is stop-displayed. This warin transition mark is one of the loose eyes (non-reach marks), and two of the three decorative patterns are decorative patterns 3 (see FIG. 74) in which the number 3 is attached to the warin pattern. In this embodiment, the warin transition result is "decoration pattern 3-decoration pattern 3-decoration pattern 5". That is, the Warin transition result is "3-3-5" in the combination of numbers in the decoration pattern, and "Warin-Warin-Urin" in the combination of the characters in the decoration pattern.

The win-win transition result is a win that is stop-displayed when a normal stage stays in a normal game state, and is a win that clearly indicates or suggests that the staying stage shifts to the win-win stage at the start of the variable game next to the variable game in which the win-win transition win is stop-displayed. This urin transition pattern is one of the rose eyes (non-reach pattern), and two decorative patterns in the combination of 3 decorative patterns are decorative patterns 5 (see FIG. 74) in which the number 5 is added to the urin pattern. In the present embodiment, the urin transition appearing number is "decorative symbol 5-decorative symbol 5-decorative symbol 7". In other words, the combination of numbers in the decoration pattern is "5-5-7" and the combination of the characters in the decoration pattern is "Urin-Urin-Marin".

The marine transition outcome is a outcome that is stop-displayed when staying in a normal stage in a normal game state, and is a outcome that clearly indicates or suggests that the stay stage is shifted to the marine stage at the start of the variable game next to the variation game in which the marine transition outcome is stop-displayed. This marine transition dot is one of the rose eyes (non-reach dots), and two of the three decorative patterns are decorative patterns 7 (see FIG. 74) in which the number 7 is attached to the marine pattern. In the present embodiment, the marine transition result is "decorative symbol 7-decorative symbol 7-decorative symbol 3". In other words, the combination of numbers in the decorative patterns is "7-7-3", and the combination of the characters in the decorative patterns is "Marine-Marine-Warin".

In other words, in the stage transition outcome of the present embodiment, the stop symbol combination includes a decorative symbol related to the main (main character) character of the transition destination. In this way, by including the decoration pattern related to the subject (main character) character (specified character) of the transition destination in the stop pattern combination, the character stage of the transition destination can be grasped based on the decoration pattern of the specific character included in the stage transition result.

Further, in the stage transition outcome of the present embodiment, a plurality of decoration symbols related to the main (main character) character of the transition destination are included in the stop symbol combination. In this way, by including a plurality of decoration patterns related to the subject (protagonist) character (specific character) of the transition destination in the stop pattern combination, the character stage of the transition destination can be more easily grasped based on the decoration patterns of the plurality of specific characters included in the stage transition results.

In the stage transition outcome of the present embodiment, there is no particular restriction on the decoration symbols other than the decoration symbols related to the main (main character) character of the transition destination in the combination of stop symbols.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal stage is shifted to the character stage at the start of the variable game next to the variable game in which the stage transition result is stopped and displayed, but the normal stage may be shifted to the character stage in a plurality of variable games from the variable game in which the stage transition result is stopped and displayed. In other words, the stage transition outcome may be used as an advance notice of the transition from the normal stage to the character stage.

<Stage transition when staying in character stage>
As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, the stage transition from the character stage to the normal stage in the normal game state is executed in the next variation game (see FIG. 81(B)) of the variation game when the later-described predetermined condition is not satisfied in the variation game in which the loss special ready-to-win effect is executed, or when the later-described second specific condition is satisfied in the variation game. That is, the stage shift timing from the character stage to the normal stage in the normal game state in this embodiment is when the predetermined condition is not established in the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed, and when the second specific condition is established. In other words, when the special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying in the character stage, in principle, the transition is made to the normal stage in the variable game executed next to the variable game.

In the present embodiment, the stage transition timing from the character stage to the normal stage is not limited to the variation game to be executed next to the variation game in which the stage transition opportunity has occurred, but may be the variation game, or may be the variation game to be performed after the next round of the variation game. That is, the stage transition timing from the character stage to the normal stage may be after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the stage transition opportunity was generated. In addition, when the stage transition from the normal stage to the character stage is performed, a stage transition announcement effect (change effect) indicating or suggesting that the stage transition will be performed may be executed immediately before the transition to the character stage. Details of the stage transition timing from the normal stage to the character stage and the stage transition announcement effect will be described later.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the variable game in which the specific character's deviating special reach performance is executed (when the predetermined deviating special reach performance is executed), there is no stage shift from the character stage to the normal stage, and the character stage stays in the variable game in which the predetermined deviating special reach performance is executed, or shifts to a character stage different from the character stage. That is, when a predetermined outlier special ready-to-win effect is executed, exceptionally the character stage is not shifted to the normal stage. Thus, by providing an exception that does not shift from the character stage to the normal stage when the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that an advantageous event will occur in the variation game executed next to the variation game when the exception occurs. As a result, the player can enjoy the variable game that is executed after the occurrence of the exception while anticipating the occurrence of an advantageous event, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Also, when staying on the character stage, when ready-to-win performances (normal ready-to-reach performance and super ready-to-reach performance) other than special ready-to-reach performance are executed, and when losing performance is executed, except for the case where the second specific condition is established, the character stays in the character stage to stay in the variable game executed next to the relevant variable game.

Here, the second specific condition includes, for example, that the number of variable games from the previous stage transition (including the stage transition within the character stage and the stage transition from the normal stage to the character stage) reaches a prescribed number, that the number of variable games after the end of the jackpot game reaches a prescribed number, that the lottery for transition from the character stage to the normal stage is won, and that a predetermined effect (except for the special performance that is not specified) is executed. In this way, by shifting from the character stage to the normal stage when the second specific condition is satisfied, the normal stage can be shifted even when the special ready-to-win performance is not executed when the later-described predetermined condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if the execution frequency of the special ready-to-win effect in which the predetermined condition is not established is low when the variable game effect is executed a large number of times, the stage is shifted to the normal stage. As a result, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as boredom due to staying in the character stage for a long period of time or staying in the character stage for a long period of time.

Incidentally, as the stage shift opportunity from the character stage to the normal stage in the normal game state, it is not limited to the execution of a predetermined miss special ready-to-win effect or the establishment of the second specific condition, and other triggers can be set. In addition, the transition from the character stage to the normal stage in the normal game state, and the stage transition and stay in the character stage will be described below.

Here, when the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed, as a ``predetermined condition'' for exceptionally not executing the transition from the character stage to the normal stage, it is conceivable that, for example, the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed includes the suspension to execute the predetermined variable game. That is, the exception that the stage transition from the character stage to the normal stage is not executed is used as the first pending look-ahead effect for the first special symbol. Thus, when an exception occurs in which the transition from the character stage to the normal stage is not executed, the exception is the read-ahead performance, so that the player can grasp that the predetermined variable game is executed as the variable game to be executed next to the variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the variable game executed after the occurrence of the exception while expecting that the variable game is a predetermined variable game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The predetermined variable game includes, for example, a variable game informing that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, a variable game in which a super ready-to-win performance is executed (a variable game in which the variable display time is 60 seconds), and a variable game in which a special ready-to-win performance is executed (a variable game in which the variable display time is 90 seconds). Thus, when an exception occurs in which the transition from the character stage to the normal stage is not executed, the player can grasp that any one of the variable game informing the big win, the variable game in which the super ready-to-win performance is executed, and the variable game to execute the special ready-to-win performance is executed as the variable game to be executed next to the variable game. Also, the super ready-to-win effect and the special ready-to-win effect are effects with a high degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, in the variable game executed after the occurrence of the exception, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to be informed that the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Here, FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship to the transition destination character stage after execution of the loss special ready-to-win effect in the character stage. In FIG. 82, when a predetermined condition is established in the variable game in which the specific character's loss special reach effect is executed (when the predetermined loss special reach effect is executed), the stay stage in the variable game is the same as the stay stage after the end of the variable game. The same applies to the description referring to FIG. The same applies to the effect pattern processing described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82, when a predetermined loss special ready-to-win effect is executed when staying in a character stage in a normal game state, and when the look-ahead content for the first hold of the first special figure is execution of a specific character losing super ready-to-win effect (variation display time is 60 seconds), the stay stage (pre-transition stage) in the variable game in which the predetermined lost special ready-to-win effect is executed and the stay stage (transition destination stage) in the variable game to be executed next to the variable game are different.

For example, if the pre-transition stage is the warin stage and the look-ahead content is off and the execution of the super reach effect is performed, the transition is made to the warin stage or the marine stage in the variation game executed next to the variation game. Further, when the pre-transition stage is the Urin stage and the content of the look-ahead is different and the execution of the super ready-to-win effect is performed, the transition is made to the Warin stage or the Marine stage in the variation game executed next to the variation game. Further, when the pre-transition stage is the marine stage and the content of the look-ahead is different and the execution of the super ready-to-win effect is performed, the transition is made to the Warin stage or the Urin stage in the variable game executed next to the variable game.

On the other hand, if a predetermined loss special reach effect is executed when staying in the character stage in the normal game state, the look-ahead content for the first reservation of the first special figure is execution of a variable game that informs that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, or execution of a loss special reach effect If the stay stage (pre-transition stage) in the variable game in which the predetermined loss special reach effect is executed and the stay stage (transition destination stage) in the variable game that is executed next to the variable game are the same or Different. That is, when the content of the look-ahead is the execution of a variable game informing a big hit or the execution of a winning special ready-to-win performance, a stage transition between different character stages (different character transition) or a stage transition between the same character stages (same character transition) is performed between the variable game and the next variable game.

For example, when the pre-transition stage is the warin stage and the content of the look-ahead is execution of a variable game informing a big hit or execution of a winning special ready-to-win performance, the variable game executed next to the variable game is shifted to any of the warin stage, the warin stage and the marine stage. When the pre-transition stage is the Urin stage and the content of the look-ahead is the execution of a variable game informing a big hit or the execution of a winning special ready-to-win performance, the variation game executed next to the variation game is shifted to any of the Warin stage, the Urin stage and the Marine stage. When the pre-transition stage is the marine stage and the content of the look-ahead is the execution of a variable game informing a big win or the execution of a winning special ready-to-win performance, the variable game executed next to the variable game is shifted to any of the Warin stage, the Urin stage and the marine stage.

That is, when a predetermined loss special ready-to-win performance is executed when staying in a character stage in a normal game state, and when shifting to a character stage in a variable game to be executed next to the variable game, it is planned that a variation game for announcing a big win, a losing super ready-to-win performance, or a losing special ready-to-win performance is executed. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the character stage after the end of the variable game when the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage, and when the player shifts to the character stage, expects to execute the variable game for notifying the big win, and enjoys the progress of the game, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a stage transition (different character transition) between different character stages occurs between the variable game in which a predetermined winning special ready-to-win performance is executed when staying in the character stage in the normal game state and the next variable game, there are all possibilities of execution of a variable game for notifying a big hit, running of a winning super ready-to-win performance, and running of a losing special ready-to-win performance. On the other hand, when a stage transition between stages of the same character is executed, there is no possibility that the content of the pre-reading is off and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. In addition, the special reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the super reach effect. Therefore, since the stage transition between the same character stages does not include the look-ahead contents and does not execute a super ready-to-win performance, the expectation that the look-ahead contents will be the execution of a big win game is high compared to the stage transition between different character stages. As a result, the player expects that the stage transition between the same character stages will be executed when the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage, and expects that the stage transition between the same character stages will be executed, expecting that the variable game for informing a big win will be executed and enjoys the progress of the game, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Also, when the content of the prefetch is off and execution of the super ready-to-win effect is performed, a stage transition between different character stages (different character transition) is performed between the variation game and the next variation game. In other words, when the content of the look-ahead is off and the super ready-to-win effect is executed, stage transition between the same character stages (same character transition) is not executed between the variation game and the next variation game. Therefore, when the stage transition between the same character stages (same character transition) is executed, the content of the look-ahead is either the execution of a variable game informing a big hit or the execution of a winning special ready-to-win effect. Then, when 90 seconds is set as the variable display time of the variable game in which the content of the look-ahead notifies the big win, the big win special ready-to-win performance is executed. Therefore, when the stage transition between the same character stages (same character transition) is executed between the variable game and the next variable game, the special ready-to-win performance is always executed regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss. Thus, when the special ready-to-win performance is, for example, a battle performance with an enemy character, the enemy character whose specific character has been defeated in the previously executed losing special ready-to-win performance can be defeated by the big hit special ready-to-win performance to be executed thereafter. In this way, the player can get a sense of satisfaction from taking revenge on the enemy character who was defeated first, and can get a sense of revenge for the special reach performance itself by being notified of the big hit by the same special reach performance as the special reach performance that has lost earlier, so that the amusement of the game is improved in this respect as well.

In addition, when shifting to the character stage of the specified character (corresponding character) in the variation game executed next to the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specified character is executed, the special ready-to-win performance is always executed after that regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss. Therefore, even if the player feels uncomfortable due to the shift to the character stage of the specific character (corresponding character) in the variable game executed next to the variable game in which the special ready-to-reach performance is executed without the specific character, the player can understand the meaning of feeling uncomfortable by executing the special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character with high expectation for big win.

Further, in the case of shifting to the character stage of the specific character (corresponding character) in the variable game to be executed next to the variation game in which the special ready-to-win performance is performed without the specific character, the special ready-to-win performance may be executed as the final individual performance even in the case of the variable display time (60 seconds) in which the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y1 to Y3 are executed thereafter. That is, in the present embodiment, the special ready-to-win effect may be executed as the final individual effect when it is not the variable display time for executing the special ready-to-win effect pattern.

Also, the special ready-to-win performance as the final individual performance for revenge against the special ready-to-win performance of a specific character may be executed by omitting a part of the variable game performance in the variable game, executing the special ready-to-win performance from the middle to the last part, and starting the special ready-to-win performance from the variable game executed before the variable game. Thus, even if the time for executing the special ready-to-win performance of the specified character is insufficient in the variable game, it is possible to execute the special ready-to-win performance to the end (display the notification result) in the variable game. For example, in the case of the variable display time (60 seconds) in which the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y3 are executed, the special ready-to-win effect is executed as the final individual effect.

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the prefetch content for the first reservation of the first special figure is associated with the stage transition when the special ready-to-win effect is performed.

[Command judgment processing]
The command determination process of the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the process associated with the stage transition when the special ready-to-win effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received and the look-ahead content for the first reservation of the first special figure is not performed is executed in the effect pattern setting process. Further, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when a predetermined command is received, the contents of the first suspension of the first special figure and the second suspension of the second special figure are updated.

Here, FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The command determination processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3501 and S3502>
As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command transmitted from the main controller 4 (step S2101: Yes), it determines whether the received command is the first pending command (step S3501). Here, the first pending command is, when the pending number N stored in the first pending storage area REA (see FIG. 13) of the pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 increases, is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the pending number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold.

Then, when the received command is the first hold command (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the contents stored in the first hold information storage area 53A of the hold information storage area 53A set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 according to the contents of the received first hold command.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the first pending command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3502.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
If the received command is not the first pending command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second pending command (step S3503). Here, the second hold command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result, the variation pattern, and the number of holds M in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number M stored in the second hold storage area REB (see FIG. 13) of the hold storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 increases.

Then, when the received command is the second hold command (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the contents stored in the second hold information storage area 53B of the hold information storage area 53B set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 according to the contents of the received second hold command.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the second pending command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If the received command is not the second pending command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first pending shift command (step S3505). Here, the first pending shift command, when the pending number N of the first special figure is reduced, the first pending storage area REA1 in the first pending storage area REA of the pending storage area 412b set in the RAM412 of the main control device 4 ~ 4th reservation area REA4 (see FIG. 13) is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the success or failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in (see FIG. 13) has shifted.

Then, when the received command is the first hold shift command (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the contents stored in the first hold information storage area 53A of the hold information storage area 53A set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 according to the contents of the received first hold shift command.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the first pending shift command (step S3505: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3507.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the received command is not the first pending shift command (step S3505: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first pending shift command (step S3507). Here, the second pending shift command is, when the pending number M of the second special figure decreases, the first pending area REB1 in the second pending storage area REB of the pending storage area 412b set in the RAM412 of the main control device 4 ~ 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 13) is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the success or failure information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has shifted.

Then, when the received command is the second hold shift command (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the contents stored in the second hold information storage area 53B of the hold information storage area 53A set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 according to the contents of the received second hold shift command.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the second pending shift command (step S3507: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3507.

<Step S3509>
If the received command is not the second pending shift command (step S3507: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the variation pattern command (step S3509). If the received command is a variation pattern command (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3510, and if the received command is not a variation pattern command (step S3509: No), performs other command-based processing (steps S2106 to S2122), and ends the command determination process.

<Steps S3510 to S3513>
If the received command is a variation pattern command (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect pattern setting process based on the variation pattern command and the first reservation for the first special figure (step S3510), and the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3511). Details of the effect pattern setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time based on the variation pattern command (step S3513), and outputs the display variation pattern command for specifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and ends the command determination process.

[Production pattern setting process]
In the production pattern setting process of the present embodiment, the transition destination stage is set together with the production pattern to be executed in the variation game. Here, FIGS. 84 to 87 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. The effect pattern setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 84, in the effect pattern setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character stage stay flag indicating that the character is staying in the character stage is set to ON (step S3601). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stay stage is a character stage (whether or not it is a normal stage). This character stage stay flag is set to ON when shifting from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3641 in FIG. 86 to be described later), and is set to OFF when shifting from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3608 to be described later). Also, the character stage stay flag includes a warin stage stay flag indicating staying at the warin stage, a warin stage stay flag indicating staying at the warin stage, and a marine stage staying flag indicating staying at the marine stage, and it is possible to distinguish which character stage is staying among the character stages.

If the character stage stay flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if the character stays in the character stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3605. On the other hand, if the character stage stay flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), that is, if the character stays in the normal stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
When the character stage stay flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), i.e., when staying in the normal stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first character stage shift flag for shifting the stay stage from the normal stage to the character stage is set to ON (step S3602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to shift from the stay stage normal stage to the character stage.

This first character stage transition flag is set to ON when a specific character's loss super ready-to-reach effect is executed when staying in the normal stage, when a specific character's loss special reach effect including a specific hold is executed during the first hold of the first special figure described later, or when the first specific condition for moving from the normal stage to the character stage is satisfied (step S3616 to be described later, steps S3623 and S3627 in FIG. 85), and set to OFF when the stay stage is changed to the character stage. (step S3631 in FIG. 86 to be described later). The first character stage transition flag includes a first warin stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the warin stage, a first urin stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the urin stage, and a first marine stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the marine stage.

Then, when the first character stage shift flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when shifting the stay stage from the normal stage to the character stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3629 in FIG. On the other hand, if the first character stage transition flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if the stay stage is to stay in the normal stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Steps S3603 and S3604>
If the first character stage transition flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if the stay stage is to remain in the normal stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specified conditions for stage transition within the normal stage are satisfied (step S3603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to perform a stage transition within the normal stage.

Here, the specified conditions for stage transition within the normal stage include, as described above, execution of a specified number of variable games from the previous stage transition, execution of a specified number of variable games from the end of the jackpot game, winning of a lottery for transition to another stage in the normal stage, suspension of other stage transition results in the normal stage, execution of a predetermined effect (excluding a specific outlier ready-to-win effect), and the like.

If the specified condition is satisfied (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the stage is to be shifted within the normal stage, the MPU 51 shifts the stage within the normal stage (step S3604), and shifts the process to step S3609.

It should be noted that the stage transition within the normal stage only requires that the stay stage transition to another stage, and there are no particular restrictions on the method of selecting the transition destination stage. For example, the destination stage may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the performance pattern set for the variable game.

In this way, by executing the stage transition within the normal stage, it is possible to prevent the player from staying in the same stage for a long time in the normal stage, so that the player is restrained from feeling discomfort such as boredom due to staying in the same stage in the normal stage for a long time. In particular, by executing the stage transition within the normal stage upon establishment of the specified condition, it is possible to more reliably prevent the player from staying in the same stage for a long period of time within the normal stage, so that the player's feeling of discomfort such as boredom is suppressed more appropriately.

On the other hand, if the specified condition is not satisfied (step S3603: No), that is, if the stage transition is not performed within the normal stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3609 without performing the stage transition within the normal stage.

<Step S3605>
If the character stage stay flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if the player is staying in the character stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the normal stage shift flag for shifting the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage is set to ON (step S3605). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to shift the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage.

This normal stage transition flag is set when the above-mentioned second specific condition is satisfied when staying on the character stage, or when the variable game in which the loss special ready-to-win effect is executed when staying on the character stage is started, there is a specific hold (jackpot hold where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, loss hold when the variable display time is 60 seconds (holding when the losing super ready-to-win effect is executed), or loss hold when the variable display time is 90 seconds (hold when the losing special reach effect is executed)). If not included, it is set to ON (step S3641 in FIG. 86 and step S3653 in FIG. 87 to be described later), and is set to OFF when the stay stage is shifted to the normal stage (step S3608 to be described later). The normal stage transition flag includes a home stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the home stage, a school stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the school stage, and a downtown stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the town stage.

Then, when the normal stage shift flag is set to ON (step S3605: Yes), that is, when shifting the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3606. On the other hand, when the normal stage shift flag is set to OFF (step S3605: No), that is, when making the stay stage stay in the character stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3632 in FIG.

<Steps S3606 to S3608>
When the normal stage shift flag is set to ON (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 sets off the character stage stay flag indicating that the stay stage is the character stage (step S3607), sets off the normal stage shift flag for shifting the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage (step S3608), and shifts the process to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
When the stay stage is a normal stage (including a stage transition within the normal stage or a stage transition from the character stage to the normal stage at the start of the variable game (steps S3604 and S3606)), the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the variable game is 30 seconds (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the normal reach effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

Then, when the variable display time of the variable game is 30 seconds (step S3610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal reach effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game based on the normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 75A) (step S3610), and ends the effect pattern setting process.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 30 seconds (step S3610: No), that is, when the normal ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the process proceeds to step S3611.

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
When the variable display time of the variable game is not 30 seconds (step S3610: No), that is, when the normal reach effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the variable game is 60 seconds (step S3611). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a super ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

Then, when the variable display time of the variable game is 60 seconds (step S3611: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a super ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game based on the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 75(B)) (step S3611), and shifts the process to step S3613.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 60 seconds (step S3611: No), that is, when the super ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the process proceeds to step S3617 of FIG.

<Step S3613>
When the super reach effect pattern is set as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S3611), the MPU 51 determines whether the super reach effect pattern is the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the super reach effect of the specific character (warin, urin, marin) is executed (step S3613). If the super ready-to-win effect pattern is one of the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the super ready-to-win effect of the specific character (Warin, Urin, Marin) is executed (step S3613: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the super ready-to-win effect pattern is not the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the super ready-to-win effect is executed for the specific characters (Warin, Urin, Marine) (step S3613: No), that is, if the super ready-to-win effect pattern is the effect pattern Y4 to Y5 (see FIG. 76A) to execute the super ready-to-win effect other than the super ready-to-win effect for the specific characters (Warin, Urin, Marine), the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Step S3614>
If the super ready-to-win effect pattern is one of the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 76(A)) in which the super ready-to-win effect of a specific character (Warin, Urin, Marin) is executed (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost (step S3614). MPU51, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is out (step S3614: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3615. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not out (step S3614: No), that is, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 ends the production pattern setting process.

<Steps S3615 and S3616>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the super reach effect that is lost as the stage transition destination (step S3615). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the Warin stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the losing super ready-to-win performance is Warin, sets the Urin stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the losing super ready-to-win performance is Urin, and sets the marine stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the losing super ready-to-win performance is Marine.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on a first character stage shift flag for shifting the staying stage from the normal stage to the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the super ready-to-win performance out of the character stages (step S3616), and terminates the performance pattern setting process.

This first character stage transition flag is referred to determine whether or not the stay stage is to be transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3602), and if the first character stage transition flag is ON (step S3602: Yes), the stay stage is transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage corresponding to the specific character in the deviated super ready-to-win effect among the character stages (step S3629 in FIG. 86). That is, when a specific character's deviating super reach performance is executed while staying on a normal stage, the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the deviating super reach performance is shifted in the next variation game of the variation game.

<Steps S3617 and S3618>
When the variable display time of the variable game is not 60 seconds (step S3611: No), that is, when the super ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, as shown in FIG. 85, the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the variable game is 90 seconds (step S3617). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a special ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

Then, when the variable display time of the variable game is 90 seconds (step S3617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a special ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game based on the special ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 75(C)) (step S3618), and shifts the process to step S3619.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 90 seconds (step S3617: No), that is, when the special ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the process proceeds to step S3625.

<Step S3619>
When the special reach effect pattern is set as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S3618), the MPU 51 determines whether the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the special reach effect of the specific character (Warin, Urin, Marin) is executed (step S3619). If the special reach effect pattern is one of the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the special reach effect of a specific character (Warin, Urin, Marin) is executed (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3620. On the other hand, if the special ready-to-win effect pattern is not the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 76A) in which the special ready-to-reach effect is executed for the specific characters (Warin, Urin, and Marin) (step S3619: No), that is, if the special ready-to-win effect pattern is the effect pattern Z4 to Z5 (see FIG. 76A) to execute the special ready-to-win effect other than the special ready-to-win effect for the specific characters (Warin, Urin, and Marine), the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Step S3620>
If the special ready-to-win effect pattern is one of the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 76(A)) in which the special ready-to-win effect of the specific character (Warin, Urin, Marin) is executed (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery for the variable game is lost (step S3620). MPU51, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game is out (step S3620: Yes), shifts the process to step S3621. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not out (step S3620: No), that is, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 ends the production pattern setting process.

<Steps S3621-3623>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is out (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 refers to the first reservation information storage area 53A (see FIG. 73) of the reservation information storage area 53 set in the RAM 512, and judges whether or not a hold that the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big hit or a hold that a special reach effect is executed (a hold with a variable display time of 90 seconds) is included during the first hold for the first special figure. step S3621).

Then, the MPU 51 ends the performance pattern setting processing when the first suspension for the first special figure does not include the suspension that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win or the suspension that the special ready-to-win performance is executed (suspension of the variable display time of 90 seconds) (step S3621: No). That is, when the special ready-to-win effect of the specific character is executed while staying in the normal stage, the transition from the normal stage to the character stage is not performed unless the specific suspension is included in the first suspension.

On the other hand, the MPU 51, when the first suspension for the first special prize includes the suspension that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win or the suspension that the special ready-to-win production is executed (suspension of the variable display time of 90 seconds) (step S3621: Yes), sets the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the lost special ready-to-win production as the stage transition destination (step S3622). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the Warin stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the loss special ready-to-win performance is Warin, sets the Urin stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the loss special ready-to-win performance is Urin, and sets the marine stage as the transition destination stage when the specific character of the failure special ready-to-win performance is Marine.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on a first character stage shift flag for shifting the stay stage from the normal stage to the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the special ready-to-win performance out of the character stages (step S3623), and terminates the performance pattern setting process.

This first character stage transition flag is referred to determine whether or not the stay stage is to be transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3602), and if the first character stage transition flag is ON (step S3602: Yes), the stay stage is transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage corresponding to the specific character in the deviated super ready-to-win effect among the character stages (step S3629 in FIG. 86). That is, when a specific character's loss special reach effect is executed while staying on a normal stage, the character stage corresponding to the specific character of the loss special reach effect is shifted to in the next variation game of the variation game. In other words, when the special ready-to-win effect of the specific character is executed while staying on the normal stage, as long as the specific hold is included in the first hold, the normal stage is shifted to the character stage as an exception.

In this way, when staying in the normal stage, the normal stage is shifted to the character stage, triggered by execution of the specific character's missing special ready-to-win effect. In this case, the transition destination character stage is, in principle, a character stage of a character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character of the special ready-to-win effect. In this way, in the next variation game in which the loss special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character is executed, the stage performance of the specified character is avoided in the next variation game to which the loss special ready-to-reach performance is executed by shifting to a stage other than the specific character. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the stage performance of the specified character in the next variation game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, even if the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance in which the specific character is life-or-death, the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next variation game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the variable game next to the special ready-to-win performance, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Also, in this embodiment, as an exception, when there is a specific hold in the first hold for the first special figure, the character stage is shifted to the character stage of the character (corresponding character) determined according to the specific character type of the lost special reach production. Therefore, when a special ready-to-win performance of a specific character is performed when staying in a normal stage, and the character stage is shifted to a character stage of a specific character (corresponding character) in the special ready-to-win performance in the next variation game, it is determined that a variable game to notify a big hit or a variable game to perform a special ready-to-win performance is included during the first holding for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is performed. Therefore, when the loss special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed and the character stage of the specified character (corresponding character) in the loss special ready-to-win performance is shifted to the character stage of the specified character (corresponding character) in the next variable game, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the execution of the variable game in which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, and thus the amusement of the game is improved.

<Steps S3624 and S3625>
When the variable display time of the variable game is not 90 seconds (step S3617: No), the MPU 51 sets a complete failure effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S3624), and determines whether or not the above-described first specific condition for shifting from the normal stage to the character stage is established (step S3625).

Here, as the first specific condition, as described above, for example, the number of variable games from the previous stage transition (including the stage transition within the normal stage and the stage transition from the character stage to the normal stage) reaches the specified number, the number of variable games after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number, the lottery for transition from the normal stage to the character stage is won, and a predetermined effect (except for the specified out-of-range ready-to-win effect) is executed. In this way, by shifting from the normal stage to the character stage when the first specific condition is satisfied, the character stage can be shifted even when the specific out-of-reach ready-to-reach performance (specific character's out-of-way super ready-to-reach performance or special ready-to-win performance) is not executed. Therefore, even if the execution frequency of the specific outlier ready-to-reach effect is low when the variable game effect is executed a large number of times, the game is shifted to the character stage. As a result, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as boredom due to staying in the normal stage for a long time or staying in the normal stage for a long time.

Then, when the first specific condition is satisfied (step S3625: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3626. On the other hand, when the first specific condition is not satisfied (step S3625: No), the MPU 51 allows the player to stay in the normal stage without transitioning from the normal stage to the character stage, and terminates the production pattern setting process.

<Step S3626>
If the first specific condition is satisfied (step S3625: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the destination character stage (step S3626). The method of determining the character stage to be shifted to is not particularly limited.

<Steps S3627 and S3628>
When the transition destination character stage is set (step S3626), the MPU 51 sets on the first character stage transition flag for transitioning the staying stage from the normal stage to the set character stage (step S3627), sets on the stage transition result flag indicating or suggesting transition from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3628), and ends the production pattern setting process.

Here, the first character stage transition flag is referred to determine whether the stay stage is to be transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3602), and if the first character stage transition flag is ON (step S3602 in FIG. 84: Yes), the stay stage is transitioned from the normal stage to the character stage (step S3629 in FIG. 86). That is, when the first specific condition is established during the normal stage stay, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the character stage in the next variation game of the variation game.

<Steps S3629 to S3631>
When the first character stage shift flag is set to ON (step S3602 in FIG. 84: Yes), that is, when shifting the stay stage from the normal stage to the character stage, the MPU 51 shifts the stay stage to the character stage corresponding to the type of the first character stage shift flag (step S3629), as shown in FIG. That is, when the first character stage shift flag is the first Urin stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the Urin stage, when the first character stage shift flag is the first Warin stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the Warin stage, and when the first character stage shift flag is the first marine stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the marine stage.

Then, the MPU 51 sets off the character stage stay flag indicating that the player is staying in the character stage (step S3630), and sets off the first character stage shift flag that shifts the stay stage to the character stage (step S3631).

<Step S3632>
If the normal stage transition flag is set to off (step S3605 in FIG. 84: No), that is, if the stay stage is the character stage, the MPU 51 determines whether the second character stage transition flag is set to on (step S3632).

The second character stage transition flag is a flag for performing a stage transition within the character stage. This second character stage transition flag is set to ON when the specific hold (jackpot hold where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, loss hold with a variable display time of 60 seconds (holding where a loss super ready-to-win effect is executed), and loss hold with a variable display time of 90 seconds (holding where a loss special ready-to-win effect is executed) is included in the first hold of the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the losing special ready-to-win effect is executed while staying in the character stage (step S in FIG. 87 described later). 3648, S3651 and S3654). The second character stage transition flag includes a second warin stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the warin stage, a second urin stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the urin stage, and a second marine stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the marine stage.

Then, when the second character stage transition flag is set to ON (step S3632: Yes), that is, when performing stage transition within the character stage, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3633. On the other hand, when the second character stage transition flag is set to OFF (step S3632: No), that is, when the stage transition within the character stage is not performed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3635.

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
When the second character stage transition flag is set to ON (step S3632: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the stay stage to the character stage corresponding to the type of the second character stage transition flag. That is, when the second character stage shift flag is the second Urin stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted to the Urin stage, when the second character stage shift flag is the second Warin stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted to the Warin stage, and when the second character stage shift flag is the second marine stage shift flag, the stay stage is shifted from the normal stage to the marine stage.

<Steps S3635 and S3636>
When the normal stage is shifted to the character stage, when the stage transition is performed within the character stage, when the stage transition is not performed within the character stage, that is, when the stay stage is the character stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation display time of the variation game is 30 seconds (step S3635). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the normal reach effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

Then, when the variable display time of the variable game is 30 seconds (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal reach effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game based on the normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 75A) (step S3636), and ends the effect pattern setting process. That is, when the stay stage is the character stage, the stage transition is not performed in the variation game next to the variation game, and the character stays at the same stage in the character stage.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 30 seconds (step S3635: No), that is, when the normal ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the process proceeds to step S3637.

<Steps S3637 and S3638>
When the variable display time of the variable game is not 30 seconds (step S3635: No), that is, when the normal reach effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the variable game is 60 seconds (step S3637). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a super ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

When the variable display time of the variable game is 60 seconds (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 51 sets super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y3 corresponding to the specific character of the character stage staying as the effect pattern of the variable game, based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 76B) when staying on the character stage (step S3638). Specifically, when staying at the Warin stage, the Warin super reach performance pattern Y1 is set, when staying at the Urin stage, the Urin super reach performance pattern Y2 is set, and when staying at the marine stage, the marine super reach performance pattern Y3 is set (see FIG. 76(B)). Then, when the MPU 51 sets the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y3 (step S3638), the process proceeds to step S3642.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 60 seconds (step S3637: No), that is, when the super ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the process proceeds to step S3639.

<Steps S3639 to S3641>
When the variable display time of the variable game is not 60 seconds (step S3637: No), that is, when the super reach effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the variable game is 90 seconds (step S3639). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a special ready-to-win effect pattern as the effect pattern of the variable game.

Then, when the variable display time of the variable game is 90 seconds (step S3639: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the special ready-to-win effect patterns Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the specific character of the character stage staying as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S3640), based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 76(B)) when staying on the character stage (step S3640). Specifically, when staying at the Warin stage, the Warin special reach performance pattern Z1 is set, when staying at the Urin stage, the Urin special reach performance pattern Z2 is set, and when staying at the marine stage, the marine special reach performance pattern Z3 is set (see FIG. 76(B)). Then, when the MPU 51 sets the special reach effect patterns Z1 to Z3 (step S3640), the process proceeds to step S3645.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the variable game is not 90 seconds (step S3639: No), i.e., when the ready-to-win effect pattern is not set as the effect pattern of the variable game, the MPU 51 sets a completely off effect pattern (step S3641), and shifts the process to step S3642.

<Steps S3642 to S3644>
When the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y3 are set (step S3638) or when the complete failure effect pattern is set (step S3641), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the above-mentioned second specific condition for shifting the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage is established (step S3642).

When the second specific condition is satisfied (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 51 sets any of the home stage, the school stage, and the town stage as the transition destination normal stage (step S3643). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the normal stage transition flag corresponding to the normal stage type set in step S3655 (step S3644), and terminates the effect pattern setting process.

The normal stage transition flag is a flag for transitioning the stay stage from the character stage to the normal stage. As described above, the normal stage transition flag includes a home stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the home stage, a school stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the school stage, and a town stage transition flag for transitioning the stay stage to the town center stage. That is, the MPU 51 sets on the normal stage transition flag corresponding to the normal stage type set in step S3643.

On the other hand, if the second specific condition is not satisfied (step S3642: No), the MPU 51 stays in the character stage without transitioning from the character stage to the normal stage, and ends the production pattern setting process.

<Step S3645>
When the special reach effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are set (step S3640), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the variable game is out (step S3645). MPU51 shifts the processing to step S3646 in FIG. 87 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is out (step S3645: Yes). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not out (step S3645: No), that is, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 ends the production pattern setting process.

<Step S3646>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost (step S3645: Yes), that is, when the lost special reach effect is executed in the variable game, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S3646).

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3647 when the first hold for the first special figure at the start of the variable game includes the hold that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win (step S3646: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3649 if the lottery result in the big win lottery does not contain the hold that the lottery result is a big win (step S3646: No).

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
When the first reservation for the first special figure at the start of the variable game includes the reservation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (step S3646: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the character stage corresponding to the specific character (corresponding character) of the special reach effect executed in the variable game, or the character stage of the character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character of the special reach effect executed in the variable game (step S3647). . That is, when the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variation game in which the loss special reach performance is executed during the character stage stay includes the suspension that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3646: Yes), the normal stage is not set as the stay stage in the variation game next to the variation game, and any one of the warin stage, the wrin stage and the marine stage in the character stage is set. In addition, when the first reservation for the first special figure at the start of the variation game in which the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage includes the suspension that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, the selection method of the stay stage in the next variation game of the variation game is not particularly limited, and may be selected by lottery or the like.

Then, when the transition destination character stage is set (step S3647), the MPU 51 sets the second character stage transition flag (one of the Warin stage transition flag, the Urin stage transition flag, and the Marine stage transition flag) for transitioning to the character stage set in step S3647 in the next variable game to ON (step S3648), and ends the effect pattern setting process.

<Step S3649>
If the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the loss special reach effect is executed while staying in the character stage does not include the suspension that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3646: No), the MPU 51 refers to the first pending information storage area 53A (see FIG. 73) of the pending information storage area 53 set in the RAM 512, and the super ready-to-win effect is performed during the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game. It is determined whether or not a hold (variable display time of 60 seconds) is included (step S3649).

Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3650 if the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the outlier special ready-to-win effect is performed during the character stage stay includes the suspension for the super ready-to-win effect (60 seconds of variable display time) is included (step S3649: Yes), and if the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game does not include the suspension for the super ready-to-win effect (60 seconds for the variable display time) (step S3649: Yes) S3649: No), the process proceeds to step S3652.

<Steps S3650 and S3651>
When the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying in the character stage includes the suspension to execute the super ready-to-win performance (variable display time of 60 seconds) (step S3649: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the character stage of the character (non-corresponding character) different from the specific character of the special ready-to-win performance to be executed in the variable game (step S3650). That is, when the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the deviating special ready-to-win effect is performed during the stay of the character stage includes the suspension to perform the super ready-to-win effect (variation display time of 60 seconds) (step S3650: Yes), the normal stage is not set as the staying stage in the variable game next to the variable game, and the character stage of the non-corresponding character different from the specific character of the super ready-to-win effect of the character stage is set. Specifically, when the said failure special ready-to-reach performance is a failure-warin special ready-to-win performance, the Urin stage or the marine stage is set, when the said failure special ready-to-reach performance is a failure to Urin special ready-to-reach performance, the warin stage or the marine stage is set, and when the said failure special ready-to-reach performance is the failure marine special ready-to-reach performance, the warin stage or the marine stage is set. In addition, when the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variation game in which the special ready-to-win performance is performed while staying on the character stage includes the suspension to perform the super ready-to-win performance, the selection method of the stay stage in the next variable game of the variable game is not particularly limited, and may be selected by lottery or the like from the character stages of the non-selected characters.

<Step S3652>
If the first hold for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the loss special reach effect is executed while staying in the character stage does not include the hold for the run out super ready-to-win effect (step S3649: No), the MPU 51 refers to the first hold information storage area 53A (see FIG. 73) of the hold information storage area 53 set in the RAM 512. 90 seconds) is included (step S3652).

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3653 if the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is performed while staying in the character stage includes the suspension for the execution of the special reach performance (variation display time of 90 seconds) (step S3652: Yes), and if the suspension for the execution of the special reach performance (90 seconds for the variation display time) is not included in the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variation game (step S3652: Yes) S3652: No), the process proceeds to step S3655.

<Steps S3653 and S3654>
If the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special reach effect is performed is included in the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special reach effect is performed (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the character stage corresponding to the specific character (corresponding character) of the special reach effect performed in the variable game as the transition destination stage, or the character different from the specific character in the special reach effect performed in the variable game (non-corresponding character). ) is set (step S3643). That is, when the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the loss special reach effect is executed when staying on the character stage includes the suspension in which the loss special reach effect is executed (step S3652: Yes), the normal stage is not set as the stay stage in the variable game next to the variable game, but any one of the warin stage, the warin stage and the marine stage in the character stage is set. In addition, when a hold for executing a special ready-to-win performance is included in the first holding for the first special figure at the start of the variable game for which the special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage, the stay stage selection method in the next variable game of the variable game is not particularly limited and may be selected by lottery or the like.

Then, when the transition destination character stage is set (step S3653), the MPU 51 sets the second character stage transition flag (one of the Warin stage transition flag, the Urin stage transition flag, and the marine stage transition flag) for transitioning to the character stage set in step S3647 in the next variation game to ON (step S3654), and ends the effect pattern setting process.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
When the suspension (variable display time of 90 seconds) for executing the special ready-to-win performance is not included in the first holding for the first special figure at the start of the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage, any one of the home stage, the school stage, and the town stage is set as the normal stage to be shifted to (step S3655).

Then, the MPU 51 turns on the normal stage transition flag (home stage transition flag, school stage transition flag, or town stage transition flag) corresponding to the normal stage type set in step S3655 (step S3656), and ends the effect pattern setting process.

In this way, when the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed while staying on the character stage, the transition to the normal stage or the character stage is made according to the contents during the first suspension for the first special figure at the start of the variable game. Specifically, when the first suspension does not include a specific suspension (a suspension of a big win, a suspension of executing a winning super ready-to-win performance, or a suspension of performing a winning special ready-to-win performance), a transition is made to a normal stage in the variation game next to the relevant variation game, and a transition is made to a character stage in the next variation game of the relevant variation game when the specific suspension is included in the first suspension.

When there is no specific suspension at the start of the variable game in which the loss special ready-to-win performance is executed, the stage performance of the specified character is avoided in the next variable game in which the loss special ready-to-reach performance is executed by executing the stage performance of the character other than the specified character in the next variation game in which the loss special ready-to-win performance of the specified character is executed. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the stage performance of the specified character in the next variation game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, even if the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance in which the specific character is life-or-death, the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next variation game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the variable game next to the special ready-to-win performance, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when there is a specific hold at the start of the variation game in which the special reach production is executed, the stage production of the specific character is executed in the next variation game. In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the stage performance of the specified character is executed exceptionally even when the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the development of the game will be advantageous to the player due to the occurrence of the exception, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, the setting process for stopping and displaying in the variable game the stage transition outcome (the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols) that indicates or suggests that the character stage will be shifted to when staying in the normal stage is executed.

Here, FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. The stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3701 to S3703>
As shown in FIG. 88, in the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stage shift output flag is set to ON (step S3701). The stage transition outcome flag is a flag for setting a stop display combination of decoration symbols so that a stage transition outcome (a stop symbol combination of decoration symbols that explicitly or suggests transition to a character stage when staying in a normal stage) is stop-displayed. This stage shift output flag is set to ON when the first specific condition for shifting to the character stage described above is satisfied (step S3628). That is, the stage transition outcome is stop-displayed in a variation game in which a specific condition is established when staying in a normal stage, and the stop-display of the stage transition outcome clearly or suggests that the next variation game will be shifted to the character stage.

When the stage transition rollout flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the stage transition rollout as a combination of stop display symbols for the variation game (step S3702). As described above, the stage transition outcome includes the Warin transition outcome, the Urin transition outcome, and the Marine transition outcome, and depending on the types of these stage transition outcomes (decoration pattern numbers and characters), the destination character stage is specified or suggested. Therefore, the player can grasp the transition destination character stage from the stage transition result.

Further, when the MPU 51 sets the stage transition outcome (step S3702), the MPU 51 sets the stage transition outcome flag to OFF (step S3703), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3704 when the stage transition output flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No).

<Step S3704>
When the stage transition output flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 sets the stop display combination of the decoration symbols of the variation game in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and ends the stop symbol combination setting process. However, in step S3704, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a complete failure, processing is performed so that the stage transition output is not set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, stage effects other than the specific character are executed in the next variation game after the specific character's loss special ready-to-reach effect is executed. In this way, in the next variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, the stage performance of the character other than the specific character is executed, thereby avoiding the stage performance of the specific character in the next variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the stage performance of the specified character in the next variation game after the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, even if the special ready-to-win performance is a battle performance in which the specific character is life-or-death, the stage performance of the specific character who is defeated (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next variation game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the variable game next to the special ready-to-win performance, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is executed, the stage performance of the specific character is executed in the next variable game when the specific hold is included in the first hold of the first special figure. As a result, when an exception occurs in which the stage performance of the specified character is executed in the next variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed without the specified character, the player can understand that either the variable game informing the big win or the variable game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed will be executed. Also, the super ready-to-win effect and the special ready-to-win effect are effects with a high degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, when an exception (contradiction) occurs in the stage presentation, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to be notified that the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, when shifting from a normal stage to a character stage, the destination character stage is randomly determined or determined based on the character in the ready-to-win effect. For example, in a gaming machine in which the player can select the main character in the variable game effect, when shifting from the normal stage to the character stage, the character stage selected by the player may always be transitioned to, or the transition may be made at a higher probability than other characters.

Further, when the player can select the main character in the variable game production, it is conceivable that the character can be selected from the demo screen (the screen in the standby state in which the game is not executed). For example, when the player selects the character, the variable game may be started from the character stage of the selected character. Also, when the player selects a character, the game may be started from the normal stage, or only when the character is selected while staying in the character stage, the game may be started from the stage of the selected character.

In addition, when the player can select the main character in the variable game performance, it is conceivable that the character can be selected during the variable game. For example, when the player selects the character, the next variable game after the character is selected may be started from the character stage of the selected character. Further, when the player selects a character during the variation game, the next variation game may be started from the normal stage, only when the character is selected when staying at the character stage, the next variation game may be started from the stage of the selected character, or the character stage of the selected character may be shifted to during the variation game after selecting the character.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the specific reservation is included in the first reservation of the first special reach performance when the specific character's loss special reach production is executed, the stage of the character corresponding to the specific character is exceptionally shifted to in the next variation game of the loss special reach production. It is also conceivable to execute a special reach production similar to the special reach production that triggered the shift to , and notify that it is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to wipe away the bad impression of the previous "missing special ready-to-win" performance, and to improve the impression of the gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the stage transition is performed is the start of the variable game next to the variable game in which the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity has been confirmed, but the timing at which the stage transition is performed can be set in various ways, and the stage transition may be performed after executing the stage transition forewarning effect that indicates or suggests that the stage transition will be performed. Specifically, as the stage transition mode after the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed, the following modes including the stage transition mode already described in the present embodiment are conceivable.

First, as a stage transition mode when the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed, as described below, a transition mode of a variable game after the next variation game of the variable game in which the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed and a transition mode of a variable game in which the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed are conceivable, depending on the stage transition timing.

<Transition mode in the variable game after the next variable game of the variable game in which the stage transition opportunity has occurred>
The transition timing in the case of performing the stage transition may be set to a predetermined period from the start of the next variable game of the variable game in which the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed to the end of the variable game with respect to the specific pending pending for the first or second special feature (big win pending where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, suspension where the super ready-to-win performance is executed, suspension where the special ready-to-win performance is executed).

A predetermined period from the start of the next variable game of the variable game in which the generation of the stage shift opportunity has been confirmed to the end of the variable game for the specific hold that is being held for the first special figure or the second special figure is not particularly limited as long as the stage transition timing is from the start of the next variable game to the end of the above-mentioned predetermined variable game included in the hold of the first special figure or the second special figure. For example, when the number N of reservations for the first special figure at the start of the variable game is 3 and the number M of reservations for the second special figure is 0, and the third reservation for the first special figure is a reservation for executing a predetermined variation game, the timing of the stage transition is during execution of the variation game next to the variation game (suspension 1 variation game), during execution of the next next variation game (retention 2 variation game), and during the execution of the next next next variation game (retention 3 variation game). may be

In addition, the stage transition timing in the variable game in which the stage transition is executed is not particularly limited as long as it is during the execution of the variable game in which the stage transition is executed (between the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341). (at the start of the variation of the decoration pattern in the pattern display section 341).

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a specific hold is included in the hold at the start of a variable game in which a specific character's loss special reach performance is executed, stage transition to a stage corresponding to the specific character of the loss special reach performance (same character transition) is executed. In addition, since the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is a performance with a high degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big win (big win expectation), when the special ready-to-win performance of the specific character is not successful, the players are greatly disappointed when the variation game ends. When the stage transition timing is set to a predetermined period from the start of the next variation game of the variation game in which the generation of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed to the end of the variation game for the specific reservation that is being held for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the character transition is executed in the disappointing situation after the variation game in which the special ready-to-win performance is executed without the specific character is finished. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific hold is included in the hold for a short period of time from the discouraged situation by executing the same character transfer in the situation where the player is discouraged by the execution of the special ready-to-win performance, and the discouraged situation improves at an early stage, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, when the stage transition is performed in the variable game after the next variable game of the variable game in which the generation of the stage transition opportunity is confirmed, the above-mentioned stage transition notice performance (change performance) may be executed before shifting to the stage as described above. In this case, the variable game in which the stage shift notice effect is executed may be the variable game in which the stage shift is executed as described above, or the variable game executed before the variable game in which the stage shift is executed. Further, the stage shift notice effect may be executed continuously in a plurality of variable games. In addition, when the stage transition notice performance (change performance) is executed, an image may be displayed that allows the player to select the main character in the variable game performance by using the time during which the stage shift notice performance (change performance) is executed. For example, when transitioning from a character stage to a normal stage, it is conceivable that the main character can be selected from all specific characters when executing a stage transition announcement effect (change effect). In addition, when shifting to a normal stage, it is conceivable to make it possible to select the type of normal stage to which the transition is to be made when the stage transition forewarning effect (change effect) is executed. Further, in the case of a different character transition, it is conceivable that the main character can be selected from specific characters other than the specific character of the stay stage when executing the stage transition announcement effect (change effect).

For example, when the number of reservations N for the first special pattern at the start of the variable game is 3 and the number of reservations M for the second special pattern is 0, and the third reservation for the first special pattern is a reservation for executing a predetermined variable game, as the variable game for executing the stage transition notice effect, only the next variable game (hold 1 variable game) of the variable game, only the next next variable game (hold 2 variable game), only the next next next variable game (hold 3 variable game), and hold Two variation games of 1 variation game and 2 retention variation games, 2 variation games of 1 retention variation game and 3 retention variation games, 2 variation games of 2 retention variation games and 3 retention variation games, and 3 variation games of 1 retention variation game, 2 retention variation games and 3 retention variation games are conceivable.

Here, the stage transition notice effect is not particularly limited as long as it is a unique effect that is executed when the stage transition is performed. Further, it is conceivable to increase the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the variable game for holding the first special figure or the second special figure at the start of the variable game will be a big win, depending on the type of the stage transition announcement performance, for example, the execution time of the stage transition announcement performance, the color of the specific part in the image of the stage transition announcement performance, and the like.

In this way, by executing the stage shift announcement performance (change performance) before shifting to the stage, the player can grasp in advance that the variation game for the same character shift, that is, the specific hold will be executed even in the situation where the player is disappointed when the special ready-to-win performance is executed without the specific character. Therefore, in the progress of the game after the performance of the stage shift notice performance is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the execution of the same character shift and further the execution of the variable game for the specific hold, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the stage shift notice performance (change performance) is continuously executed in a plurality of variable games, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting in which variable game the same character shift will be executed each time the stage shift notice performance is executed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

<Transition mode in the variation game where the stage transition opportunity occurred>
As the transition timing when stage transition is performed, the variation game in which the stage transition opportunity occurs can be considered. In this way, the stage transition timing when performing stage transition in the variable game in which the occurrence of the stage transition opportunity has been confirmed is not particularly limited as long as it is during the variable game, but for example, the period from the execution of the specific character's loss special reach effect to the end of the variable game, that is, immediately before the end of the variable game or at the end of the variable game. Concretely, for example, as described above, there are a certain period in which the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the pattern display part 341 and the result of the big winning lottery is suggested, the timing in which the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed to suggest the lottery result of the big winning lottery, and the period in which the stage performance is executed after the end of the ready-to-win performance as described above can be considered.

In this way, when the stage shift timing is the variable game in which the generation of the stage shift opportunity is confirmed, the player can grasp that the specific hold is included in the hold executed after the variable game in which the specific character is removed and the special ready-to-win performance is executed before the end of the variable game. Therefore, even if the special ready-to-win performance of a specific character's loss notifies that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a failure, that is, even if the player is originally disappointed in the variation game, the same character transfer is executed to improve the situation at once, so that the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, even when stage transition is performed in a variable game in which a stage transition opportunity has occurred, before transitioning to the stage as described above, a stage transition advance notice effect (change effect) indicating or suggesting that the stage transition will be performed may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In order to facilitate understanding of the corresponding relationship between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention according to the supplementary note is not limited to the specific configuration to which the reference numerals are attached. Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period when a specific condition is established. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine according to appendix A1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3']
The gaming machine according to appendix A1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', not only the specific information but also the special information that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information or the special information that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information in part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4', the special information is displayed by part of the plurality of display areas of the display means for displaying the specific information. That is, the special information display area is shared with the specific information display area. As a result, since the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display such as, for example, a 7-segment display. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with display means for displaying specific information and special information, while suppressing complication of the configuration of the game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6', the specific information and the special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in specifying or estimating the specific numerical information or the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine according to appendix A6', wherein the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7', the specific information and the special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, and the specified period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when the image display means displays the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the transition determination result, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase the interest in suggesting or specifying the result of transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through the specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9', the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11']
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) different from the first discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine according to appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A10' to A12', when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of a game ball through a second discharge port into which a game ball can enter in a special game, display contents of specific information displayed on the display means are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows passage of a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13', when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning port in the special game passes, and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the game machine for the reason that a skill difference may occur, as compared with the case where a skill difference may occur due to the game balls entering the second discharge port.

[Appendix A14']
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, a game property is imparted in which whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix A15', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determining means is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A15′ or appendix A16′, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17', since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A18', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A19', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18' or appendix A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A20', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the prescribed period is set during the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set during the execution period of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information and the speculation or specification of the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (regulation period) of the special game, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that provides a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21′, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21' or appendix A22', wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23', when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and can enjoy the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21′ to A23′, characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start time of the predetermined period is set to a special game that is executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the player can confirm a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, so that the convenience of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information and further the specific numerical information based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A23' or appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine pertaining to appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game to be started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when a plurality of specific periods exist in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. Thus, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means, so that interest in the special game can be improved.

[Appendix A26']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25', wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and if the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period, the specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-added game is finished. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A26', wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not), so that the amusement of the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period when the specific conditions are satisfied during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28', when the specific conditions are satisfied within the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the number of specific conditions to be satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine according to appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A29', wherein the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A31', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so it is possible to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′ or appendix A31′, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′ or appendix A31′, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A34']
The gaming machine according to appendix A33', wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35′]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29' to A34', wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numerals and alphabets, so that the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed without requiring advanced game knowledge.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36', the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37′]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A36'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37', the individual display section is controlled to be in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to appendix A36' or appendix A37', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39′]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A38' and A39', it is possible to form the information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information upon turning on the power of the game machine. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the predetermined period starts. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
an operation means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for displaying the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the display contents of the specific information displayed during the prescribed period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten or when the player changes, the player can confirm the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by confirming the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can determine whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47']
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A47', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed within the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The gaming machine according to appendix A46' or appendix A47', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49']
The display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display, on the second display means (35, 39, 341), the display content selected from the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine according to appendix A49', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A48' to A50', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine according to appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decorative pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machine according to appendices A51' and A52' includes a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each period of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as the variable display image display means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by causing the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period, it is possible to cause the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period by an operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine according to appendix A53′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix A54' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in which information that denies high set values such as maximum set values is not presented.

[Appendix A55']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to appendix A53', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56′, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to identify specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders include a first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the probability of advantageous decision most disadvantageous to the player and the advantage decision probability more advantageous to the player are left until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to comprehend that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine can be suppressed and the reduction in the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the probability of the highest advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the second display order is set with a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game in the gaming machine can be prevented from being terminated early, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. By lowering the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities contradicts each other until the end, so that the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be enhanced.

[Appendix A60']
the plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the third display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player can expect the possibility that the probability of advantageous determination is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous determination immediately before grasping the probability of advantageous determination. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix A61′]
the plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability;
The fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is left as non-display specific information immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), the pleasure when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63′]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A62′, wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A63', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during the standby state period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64']
The gaming machine according to appendix A62' or appendix A63', wherein the display restricting means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A64', the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since the specific information displayed in the past cannot be confirmed based on the display history, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65′]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A1' to Appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a first display order on the display means, and when a second specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A66']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A65', wherein the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A66', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67′]
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to appendix A65' or appendix A66', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69′]
Further comprising second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. Thus, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, confirm the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information after the change, so that the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70′]
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The game machine according to appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A70', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71′]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A71', the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70′ or appendix A71′, wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A72', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the second display means can surely prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information even when the game board is opened when the ball jam occurs in the game machine.

[Appendix B1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1', the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The gaming machine according to appendix B1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine according to appendix B1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2' or appendix B3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B4']
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1′ to B3′, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5']
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) different from the first discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine according to appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of the game ball through the second discharge port into which the game ball can enter in the special game, the display contents of the specific information displayed on the display means are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B6', wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of passing game balls that have passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B7', when a game ball passes through a second discharge port through which a game ball that has entered a variable winning port in a special game passes, and a specific condition is met, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the game machine for the reason that a skill difference may occur, as compared with the case where a skill difference may occur due to the game balls entering the second discharge port.

[Appendix B8']
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it is possible to provide a game feature in which whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1′ to B8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information during the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The gaming machine according to appendix B9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix B10' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix C1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, guessing or specifying the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine according to appendix C1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix C3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1′, wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only the specific information but also the special information that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information or the special information that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1′ to C3′, characterized in that the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the special game state with a lower probability than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C4', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5', since the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the start of the value-adding game.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix C7′]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix C6', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix C8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6' or appendix C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix C8', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9′]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1′ to C8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The gaming machine according to appendix C9', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix C10' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix D1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The gaming machine, wherein the prescribed period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1', when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set during the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information and the speculation or specification of the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (regulation period) of the special game, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2']
The gaming machine according to appendix D1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine according to appendix D1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that provides a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix D4', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5', when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and can enjoy the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start time of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the player can confirm a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, so that the convenience of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information and further the specific numerical information based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix D7′]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5' or appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when a plurality of specific periods exist in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. Thus, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means, so that interest in the special game can be improved.

[Appendix D8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7′, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed in the ending executed after the value-added game is finished. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D9′]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D8', wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not), so that the amusement of the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1′ to D9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine according to appendix D10', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix D11' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix E1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1', when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions will be satisfied during the predetermined period.

[Appendix E2′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E3', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5′]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The gaming machine according to appendix E4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5′, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6', individual information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of individual information items is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so it is possible to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence relationship. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or appendix E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7', the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or appendix E6', wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E9′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E8', wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5' to E9', wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numerals and alphabets, so that the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed without requiring advanced game knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11', the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix or zigzag.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11′ to E13′, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the game machines according to appendices E13' and E14', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1′ to E14′, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix E15', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16', in the first game state in which the transition determination means determines that the transition to the special game state has a lower probability than in the second game state, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix E17′]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17', the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix E18', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information for specifying the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further, the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix E20']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or appendix E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1′ to E20′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine according to appendix E21′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix E22' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix F1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period;
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine according to appendix F1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The gaming machine according to appendix F1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information upon turning on the power of the game machine. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1′ to F3′, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by the start of the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments F1' to F8', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix F11', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the transition determination means determines to shift to the special game state is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or appendix F12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix F13', since the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied after at least the start of the value-giving game.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix F14', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix F16']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1′ to F16′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine according to appendix F17', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18', when the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix F18' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix G1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
an operation means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for displaying the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the display contents of the specific information displayed during the prescribed period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten or when the player changes, the player can confirm the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by confirming the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can determine whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The gaming machine according to appendix G1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3′]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of causing the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix G4']
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G4', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed in the prescribed period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G4', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6']
The gaming machine according to appendix G5', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content selected from the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G7']
The gaming machine according to appendix G5', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machines according to appendices G5' to G7', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to appendix G8′, wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machines according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' are provided with a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period, and the specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as the variable display image display means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by causing the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period, it is possible to cause the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period by an operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1′ to G9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The gaming machine according to appendix G10', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix G11' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix H1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing display means (35, 39, 341) to distinguishably display a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The gaming machine according to appendix H1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine according to appendix H1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2' or appendix H3', not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix H4']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments H1' to H3', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to appendix H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selecting means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to identify specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders include a first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7', the first display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the probability of advantageous decision most disadvantageous to the player and the advantage decision probability more advantageous to the player are left until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to comprehend that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine can be suppressed and the reduction in the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the probability of the highest advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8', the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game in the gaming machine can be prevented from being terminated early, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. By lowering the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities contradicts each other until the end, so that the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be enhanced.

[Appendix H9']
the plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is set higher than the selection rate of the third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player can expect the possibility that the probability of advantageous determination is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous determination immediately before grasping the probability of advantageous determination. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix H10']
the plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is left as non-display specific information immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), the pleasure when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1′ to H10′, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix H11', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the transition determination result is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the special game state with a lower probability than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H11′ or appendix H12′, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13', since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11′ to H13′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H14', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14' or appendix H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, between the end of the value giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix H16', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1′ to H15′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the prescribed period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period exceeds a prescribed number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix H17' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix I1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I1', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The gaming machine according to appendix I1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2' or supplementary note I3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix I4']
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I3', wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4', the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means during the standby state period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5']
The gaming machine according to any one of additions I1' to I4', wherein the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5', the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since the specific information displayed in the past cannot be confirmed based on the display history, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1′ to I5′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. Thus, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7′]
The gaming machine according to appendix I6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix I7' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in which information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix J1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing display means (35, 39, 341) to distinguishably display a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1', when a first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information are displayed in the first display order on the display means, and when the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine according to appendix J1', wherein the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information.

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine according to appendix J1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1' to Appendix J3', wherein the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1' to Appendix J4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5′, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix J7', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state.

In the game machine according to appendix J8', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the transition determination means determines to shift to the special game state is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or appendix J8', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J9', the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game, so that the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-giving game is started.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix J10', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix J12']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10′ or appendix J11′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix J12', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1′ to J12′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J13', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. Thus, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine according to appendix J13′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J14', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix J14' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix K1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45);
with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1', the specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. Thus, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, confirm the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information after the change, so that the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine according to appendix K1', wherein the first display control means (51) can cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information.

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine according to appendix K1', wherein the first display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', the first display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thus, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The game machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The game machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the game machine according to appendix K5', the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
Controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix K4' or appendix K5', wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating the specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the second display means can surely prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information even when the game board is opened when the game machine is jammed with balls or the like.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1′ to K6′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The gaming machine according to appendix K7', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix K8' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as maximum set values is not presented.

[Appendix L1′]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (variable game) that performs a transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big win game state) in which a special game (big win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (big win lottery), and notifies the result of the transition determination by means of variable display and stop display of decorative symbols;
Effect means (341, etc.) for executing a game effect (jackpot game effect, variable game effect) in an information game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect,
with
The notification effect includes a pre-reach effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed before the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state, and a post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect, special reach effect) to be executed after the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-reach state,
The pre-reach production includes a first pre-reach production (normal stage production) and a second pre-reach production (character stage production) different from the first pre-reach production (character stage production),
The effect executing means (51)
Means for executing the first pre-reach production (ordinary stage production) in the information game next to the information game in which a specific post-reach production (special reach production of a specific character) is executed among the post-reach productions;
Means for limiting execution of the second pre-reach effect (character stage effect) in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect (special reach effect of the specific character) is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix L2']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix L1′, wherein the specific post-reach effect is the second post-reach effect.

[Appendix L3′]
The second post-reach production includes a specific character production mainly performed by a specific character and a non-specific character production not mainly by the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix L2', wherein the specific post-reach effect is a specific character effect.

[Appendix L4']
The first ready-to-reach production is a production that is not centered on the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix L3', wherein the second pre-reach effect is a effect executed mainly by the specific character.

In the game machine pertaining to appendices L1' to L4', in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach performance is executed, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted while the first pre-reach performance is executed. Thus, in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach performance is executed, the first pre-reach performance is executed and the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted, so that, for example, when the specific post-reach performance is the failure performance, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted immediately after such failure performance. Therefore, when a specific after-reach performance is, for example, a character performance with a high expectation of a big hit, it is possible to restrict execution of a pre-reach performance (stage performance) of the character corresponding to the character performance. As a result, for example, in the information game next to the execution of the missing special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character, by executing the stage performance of the character other than the specific character, execution of the stage performance of the specific character in the next information game to the next information game to which the missing special ready-to-win performance is executed is avoided. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to execution of the pre-ready-reach performance of the specific character in the information game next after the execution of the special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the game machine according to appendices L1' to L4', even if the particular character is in a life-or-death battle presentation, the stage presentation of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (in the next information game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the information game next to the failure special reach presentation, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix L5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L4', wherein the effect executing means (51) comprises means for executing the second pre-reach effect (character stage effect) in an information game subsequent to an information game in which a predetermined post-reach effect (super reach effect of a specific character) different from the specific post-reach effect (special reach effect of a specific character) among the post-reach effects (special reach effect of a specific character) is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L5', the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach effect different from the specific post-reach effect among the post-reach effects is executed. In this way, by executing the second pre-reach performance in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach performance different from the specific post-reach performance among the performances after the reach is executed, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is prevented from being excessively limited, and the second pre-reach performance can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

[Appendix L6']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix L5′, wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the first post-reach effect.

[Appendix L7']
The first after-reach production includes a specific character production mainly performed by a specific character and a non-specific character production not mainly by the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix L6′, wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is a specific character effect.

[Appendix L8']
The first ready-to-reach production is a production that is not centered on the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix L7′, wherein the second pre-reach effect is a effect executed mainly by the specific character.

In the game machine pertaining to appendices L6' to L8', the predetermined post-reach performance is the first post-reach performance in which the degree of expectation that the transition determination results in shifting to the special game state is lower than the second post-reach performance. Here, since the degree of expectation of the first after-reach performance is lower than that of the second after-reach performance, when the first after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance, the player does not have a high unpleasant feeling compared to when the second after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance. Therefore, even when the second ready-to-reach performance is executed in the information game following the information game executed as the lost performance of the first ready-to-reach performance, for example, even when the pre-reach performance of the specific character is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the loss specific character performance is executed, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the pre-reach performance of the specific character, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix L9′]
The effect executing means (51) is means for executing the second pre-reach effect in the information game next to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed when a predetermined condition is established;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1′ to L8′, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine pertaining to Supplementary Note L9', when the predetermined condition is established, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. That is, when the predetermined condition is established, exceptionally, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. By providing such an exception, when a specific after-reach performance is a failure performance, the player can advance the game while expecting that the second pre-reach performance, which is an exception, will be executed in the next information game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix L10']
A holding means (41) capable of holding a plurality of rights to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A9', wherein the predetermined condition is that, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), the reservation includes the reservation of the right to execute the information game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L10', the predetermined condition is that the reservation of the right to execute a predetermined information game is included in the reservation by the reservation means. In this way, since the prescribed condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the prescribed information game in the reservation by the holding means, the player can understand that the prescribed information game is executed when the second ready-to-reach performance, which is an exception, is executed in the next information game when the specific post-reach performance is an off performance. Therefore, when an exception to the above-described effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting it to be a predetermined information game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix L11']
The gaming machine according to appendix L10', wherein the predetermined notification game notifies that the result of the transition determination is a jackpot.

[Appendix L12']
The gaming machine according to appendix L10′ or appendix L11′, wherein the predetermined information game is a game in which a predetermined post-reach effect among the post-reach effects is executed.

[Appendix L13']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the second post-reach effect.

In the game machine according to appendices L11' to L13', the predetermined information game is a predetermined information game such as an information game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is a big hit, and a second reach-after performance highly expected that the result of the transition determination will shift to a special game state. Thus, the predetermined information game is advantageous to the player, and there is a high expectation that it is an information game that notifies that the result of the transition determination is a big win. Therefore, when the specific post-ready-to-win performance is a lost performance, if an exception occurs in which the second ready-to-reach pre-performance is executed in the next information game, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the result of the transition determination to be a big win, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix M1']
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (variable game) that performs a transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big win game state) in which a special game (big win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (big win lottery), and notifies the result of the transition determination by means of variable display and stop display of decorative symbols;
Effect means (341, etc.) for executing a game effect (jackpot game effect, variable game effect) in an information game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect,
with
The notification effect includes a pre-reach effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed before the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state, and a post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect, special reach effect) to be executed after the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-reach state,
The pre-reach production includes a first pre-reach production (normal stage production) and a second pre-reach production (character stage production) different from the first pre-reach production (character stage production),
The effect executing means (51)
Means for executing the first pre-reach production (ordinary stage production) in the information game next to the information game in which a specific post-reach production (special reach production of a specific character) is executed among the post-reach productions;
Means for limiting execution of the second pre-reach effect (character stage effect) in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect (special reach effect of the specific character) is executed;
Means for executing the second pre-reach production in the information game next to the information game in which the specific post-reach production is executed when a predetermined condition is established;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1', when a predetermined condition is established, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. That is, when the predetermined condition is established, exceptionally, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. By providing such an exception, when a specific after-reach performance is a failure performance, the player can proceed with the game while expecting that the second pre-reach performance, which is an exception, will be executed in the next information game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix M2']
A holding means (41) capable of holding a plurality of rights to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix M1', wherein the predetermined condition is that, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), the reservation includes the reservation of the right to execute the predetermined information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M2', the predetermined condition is that the reservation of the right to execute a predetermined information game is included in the reservation by the reservation means. In this way, since the prescribed condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the prescribed information game in the reservation by the holding means, the player can understand that the prescribed information game will be executed when the second pre-reach performance as an exception is executed in the next information game when the specific post-reach performance is a failure performance. Therefore, when an exception to the above-described effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game in anticipation of a predetermined information game, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Appendix M3']
The gaming machine according to appendix M2', wherein the predetermined notification game notifies that the result of the transition determination is a jackpot.

[Appendix M4']
The gaming machine according to appendix M2' or appendix M3', wherein the predetermined information game is a game in which a predetermined post-reach effect among the post-reach effects is executed.

[Appendix M5']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix M4', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the second post-reach effect.

In the game machines according to appendices M3' to M5', the predetermined information game is a predetermined information game such as an information game for notifying that the result of transition determination is a big win, and a second reach-after performance highly expected that the result of transition determination will shift to a special game state. Thus, the predetermined information game is advantageous to the player, and there is a high expectation that it is an information game that notifies that the result of the transition determination is a big win. Therefore, when the specific post-ready-to-win performance is a lost performance, if an exception occurs in which the second ready-to-reach pre-performance is executed in the next information game, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the result of the transition determination to be a big win, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix N1']
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (variable game) that performs a transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big win game state) in which a special game (big win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (big win lottery), and notifies the result of the transition determination by means of variable display and stop display of decorative symbols;
Effect means (341, etc.) for executing a game effect (jackpot game effect, variable game effect) in an information game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect,
with
The notification effect includes a pre-reach effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed before the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state, and a post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect, special reach effect) to be executed after the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-reach state,
The pre-reach production includes a first pre-reach production (normal stage production) and a second pre-reach production (character stage production) different from the first pre-reach production (character stage production),
The effect executing means (51)
Means for executing the first pre-reach production (ordinary stage production) in the information game next to the information game in which a specific post-reach production (special reach production of a specific character) is executed among the post-reach productions;
Means for limiting execution of the second pre-reach effect (character stage effect) in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect (special reach effect of the specific character) is executed;
Means for executing the second ready-to-reach pre-effect (character stage effect) in the information game next to the information game in which a predetermined post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect of the specific character) different from the specific post-reach effect (special ready-to-reach effect of the specific character) is executed among the post-reach effects;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix N1', the second pre-reach performance is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach performance different from the specific post-reach performance of the post-reach performance is executed. In this way, by executing the second pre-reach performance in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach performance different from the specific post-reach performance among the performances after the reach is executed, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is prevented from being excessively limited, and the second pre-reach performance can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

[Appendix N2']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix N1', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the first post-reach effect.

[Appendix N3']
The first after-reach production includes a specific character production mainly performed by a specific character and a non-specific character production not mainly by the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix N2', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is a specific character effect.

[Appendix N4']
The first ready-to-reach production is a production that is not centered on the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix N3′, wherein the second pre-reach effect is a effect executed mainly by the specific character.

In the game machine according to notes N2' to N4', the predetermined post-reach performance is the first post-reach performance in which the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination is to shift to the special game state is lower than the second post-reach performance. Here, since the degree of expectation of the first after-reach performance is lower than that of the second after-reach performance, when the first after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance, the player does not have a high unpleasant feeling compared to when the second after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance. Therefore, even when the second ready-to-reach performance is executed in the information game following the information game executed as the lost performance of the first ready-to-reach performance, for example, even when the pre-reach performance of the specific character is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the loss specific character performance is executed, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the pre-reach performance of the specific character, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the game machine according to notes N2' to N4', even if the particular character is in a life-or-death battle presentation, the stage presentation of the specific character who has lost (dead) is not immediately executed (in the next information game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the information game following the failure special reach presentation, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix O1']
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (variable game) that performs a transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big win game state) in which a special game (big win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (big win lottery), and notifies the result of the transition determination by means of variable display and stop display of decorative symbols;
Effect means (341, etc.) for executing a game effect (jackpot game effect, variable game effect) in an information game (variable game) that notifies the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect,
with
The notification effect includes a pre-reach effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) executed before the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state, and a post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect, special reach effect) to be executed after the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-reach state,
The pre-reach production includes a first pre-reach production (normal stage production) and a second pre-reach production (character stage production) different from the first pre-reach production (character stage production),
The effect executing means (51)
Means for executing the first pre-reach production (ordinary stage production) in the information game next to the information game in which a specific post-reach production (special reach production of a specific character) is executed among the post-reach productions;
Means for limiting execution of the second pre-reach effect (character stage effect) in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect (special reach effect of the specific character) is executed;
Means for executing the second ready-to-reach pre-effect (character stage effect) in the information game next to the information game in which a predetermined post-reach effect (super ready-to-win effect of the specific character) different from the specific post-reach effect (special ready-to-reach effect of the specific character) is executed among the post-reach effects;
Means for executing the second pre-reach production in the information game next to the information game in which the specific post-reach production is executed when a predetermined condition is established;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix O2']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix O1', wherein the specific post-reach effect is the second post-reach effect.

[Appendix O3']
The second post-reach production includes a specific character production mainly performed by a specific character and a non-specific character production not mainly by the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix O2', wherein the specific post-reach effect is a specific character effect.

[Appendix O4']
The first ready-to-reach production is a production that is not centered on the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix O3′, wherein the second pre-reach effect is a effect that is executed mainly by the specific character.

In the game machine according to notes O1' to O4', in the information game next to the information game in which the specific post-reach performance is executed, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted while the first pre-reach performance is executed. Thus, in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach performance is executed, the first pre-reach performance is executed and the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted, so that, for example, when the specific post-reach performance is the failure performance, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is restricted immediately after such failure performance. Therefore, when a specific after-reach performance is, for example, a character performance with a high expectation of a big hit, it is possible to restrict execution of a pre-reach performance (stage performance) of the character corresponding to the character performance. As a result, for example, in the information game next to the execution of the missing special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character, by executing the stage performance of the character other than the specific character, execution of the stage performance of the specific character in the next information game to the next information game to which the missing special ready-to-win performance is executed is avoided. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to execution of the pre-ready-reach performance of the specific character in the information game next after the execution of the special ready-to-reach performance of the specific character, and the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the game machine according to appendices O1' to O4', even if the particular character is in a life-or-death battle performance, the stage performance of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (in the next information game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the information game following the failure special reach performance, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machines according to notes O1' to O4', when a predetermined condition is established, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. That is, when the predetermined condition is established, exceptionally, the second pre-reach effect is executed in the information game subsequent to the information game in which the specific post-reach effect is executed. By providing such an exception, when a specific after-reach performance is a failure performance, the player can proceed with the game while expecting that the second pre-reach performance, which is an exception, will be executed in the next information game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine according to notes O1' to O4', the second pre-reach performance is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach performance different from the specific post-reach performance of the post-reach performance is executed. In this way, by executing the second pre-reach performance in the information game next to the information game in which the predetermined post-reach performance different from the specific post-reach performance among the performances after the reach is executed, the execution of the second pre-reach performance is prevented from being excessively limited, and the second pre-reach performance can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

[Appendix O5']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to any one of notes O1' to O5', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the first post-reach effect.

[Appendix O6']
The first after-reach production includes a specific character production mainly performed by a specific character and a non-specific character production not mainly by the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix O5', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is a specific character effect.

[Appendix O7']
The first ready-to-reach production is a production that is not centered on the specific character,
The gaming machine according to appendix O6', wherein the second pre-reach effect is a effect executed mainly by the specific character.

In the game machine pertaining to notes O5' to O7', the predetermined post-reach performance is the first post-reach performance in which the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination is to shift to the special game state is lower than the second post-reach performance. Here, since the degree of expectation of the first after-reach performance is lower than that of the second after-reach performance, when the first after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance, the player does not have a high unpleasant feeling compared to when the second after-reach performance is the failure and ready-to-reach performance. Therefore, even when the second ready-to-reach performance is executed in the information game following the information game executed as the lost performance of the first ready-to-reach performance, for example, even when the pre-reach performance of the specific character is executed in the information game next to the information game in which the loss specific character performance is executed, the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the pre-reach performance of the specific character, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix O8']
A holding means (41) capable of holding a plurality of rights to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1′ to O7′, wherein the predetermined condition is that, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), the reservation includes the reservation of the right to execute the information game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix O8', the predetermined condition is that the reservation of the right to execute a predetermined information game is included in the reservation by the reservation means. In this way, since the prescribed condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the prescribed information game in the reservation by the holding means, the player can understand that the prescribed information game is executed when the second ready-to-reach performance, which is an exception, is executed in the next information game when the specific post-reach performance is an off performance. Therefore, when an exception to the above-described effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting it to be a predetermined information game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix O9']
The gaming machine according to appendix O8', wherein the predetermined notification game notifies that the result of the transition determination is a jackpot.

[Appendix O10']
The gaming machine according to supplementary note O8' or supplementary note O9', wherein the predetermined information game is a game in which a predetermined post-reach effect among the post-reach effects is executed.

[Appendix O11']
The post-reach production includes a first post-reach production (super ready-to-reach production), and a second post-reach production (special ready-to-reach production) that is executed after the first post-reach production and has a higher expectation than the first post-reach production to shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination,
The gaming machine according to appendix O10', wherein the predetermined post-reach effect is the second post-reach effect.

In the game machine according to notes O9' to O11', the predetermined information game is a predetermined information game such as an information game for notifying that the result of transition determination is a big hit, and a second reach after-reach performance highly expected that the result of transition determination will shift to a special game state. Thus, the predetermined information game is advantageous to the player, and there is a high expectation that it is an information game that notifies that the result of the transition determination is a big win. Therefore, when the specific post-ready-to-win performance is a lost performance, if an exception occurs in which the second ready-to-reach pre-performance is executed in the next information game, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the result of the transition determination to be a big win, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The effect executing means (51)
When a predetermined specific effect (for example, a specific character super ready-to-win effect, a specific character special reach effect) is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image effects (stage effect) is changed after a predetermined period of time after the predetermined specific effect (for example, the marine special reach effect) is executed (for example, the variable game to be executed next to the variable game). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for causing the image display means (341) to execute the game (at the start of a game).

In the game machine pertaining to Supplementary Note A1, when the result of transition determination to a variable game in which a predetermined specific performance of a plurality of specific performances is executed is a predetermined result, a mode image performance different from the mode image performance executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image performances is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the predetermined specific performance. That is, when the predetermined specific effect is executed, the mode image effect executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the predetermined specific effect. In this way, when the prescribed specific performance is executed, the mode image performance executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, so that the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the mode image performance executed in the variation game after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, and the decline in interest in the game is restrained.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, even if the predetermined specific effect is, for example, a battle effect in which the character is life-and-death, the mode image effect of the defeated (deceased) character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game), so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity in the flow of the series of effects from the end of the predetermined specific effect to the next variable game, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix A2]
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the variable game,
The plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) include a first mode image effect (for example, a marine stage effect) in which a first effect mode image (for example, an image mainly of marines) among the plurality of effect mode images is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a second effect mode image (for example, an image not mainly on marines) different from the first effect mode image among the plurality of effect mode images is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns on the image display means (341). and a second mode image effect (for example, a stage effect other than a marine stage effect),
The plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-reach effect, special ready-to-reach effect) include a first specific effect (e.g., marine special ready-to-reach effect) corresponding to the first effect mode image (e.g., marine-based image);
including
The effect executing means (51)
means for executing the second mode image effect (for example, a stage effect other than the marine stage effect) after a predetermined period of time after the first specific effect (for example, the marine special reach effect) is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game to be executed next to the variable game) when the first specific effect (for example, the marine special reach effect) is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, the jackpot lottery result is lost);
When the first specific effect (for example, marine special reach effect) is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, the jackpot lottery result is lost), the right to execute the variable game held by the holding means (41) includes the right to execute a specific variable game (for example, a variable game that informs that the lottery result is a big win, a variable game in which the variable display time is longer than a predetermined time, and a variable game in which a super ready-to-win effect or a special reach effect is executed). means for executing the first mode image presentation (for example, marine stage presentation) if included;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, the second mode image effect is executed after a predetermined period of time when the first specific effect is executed when the result of the transition determination for the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is the predetermined result. After that, the first mode image effect is executed. That is, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, the first mode image performance is not executed after the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed except when the specific variable game is held. Thus, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, the first mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the first specific performance except when the specific variable game is suspended, so that the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the first mode image performance after the execution of the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix A2, even if the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is, for example, a battle effect in which the character is in a life-or-death battle, the first mode image effect of the defeated (dead) character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A2, when there is suspension of the specific variable game, the first mode image performance is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the first specific performance when the result of transition determination to the variable game in which the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed is a predetermined result. Thus, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed when the specific variable game is held, the first mode image performance is exceptionally executed after the first specific performance is executed. In other words, when the law is violated by executing the first mode image performance after the execution of the first specific performance, the variable game for suspension executed after the variation game in which the first specific performance is executed includes the specific variation game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific variable game is included in the variable game to be held executed after the variable game in which the first specific performance is executed, when the rule of executing the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance. Thus, when the first mode image performance is executed after the execution of the first specific performance, the player can watch the progress of the game with pleasure that the specific variation game is executed after the variation game in which the first specific performance is executed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game that informs that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the specific variable game is a variable game that notifies that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. In this way, since the specific variable game is a variable game that notifies that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the special game state, when the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed, if the law is broken in which the first mode image effect is executed after the execution of the first specific effect, the player can shift the result of the transition determination to the special game state during the variable game for suspension executed after the variable game in which the first specific effect is executed. It can be understood that a variable game that informs that it is a thing is included. As a result, when the rule breaking of executing the first mode image performance occurs after the execution of the first specific performance, the player can watch the progress of the game with pleasure of the execution of the variable game for notifying that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the special game state, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2 or appendix A3, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is a predetermined time or longer.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. In this way, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed by the variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative pattern is longer than the predetermined time, and when the rule of executing the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance occurs, the player can grasp that the variable game with the variable display time of the decorative pattern is longer than the predetermined time is included in the variable games to be held which are executed after the variable game in which the first specific performance is executed. Here, the variable display time of the decoration pattern is determined based on the result of the transition determination, and in the variable game informing that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the special game state, a longer variable display time is likely to be selected than in the variable game to inform that the result of the shift determination is not to be shifted to the special game state. Therefore, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, when the law of executing the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance occurs, the player can watch the progress of the game with anticipation of the execution of the variable game with a high probability of notifying that the result of the shift determination is the one to be shifted to the special game state, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2 to A4, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the first specific effect (special reach effect) is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the specific variable game is a variable game in which a specific effect is executed with a transition expectation higher than a predetermined effect that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed by the variable game in which the variable display time of the decoration pattern is longer than or equal to the predetermined time, and when the first mode image effect is executed after the execution of the first specific effect is broken, the player has a transition expectation degree that the specific variable game will shift to the special game state as a result of the transition determination in the variable game with respect to the suspension executed after the variable game in which the first specific effect is executed. It can be grasped that a variable game in which a specific effect higher than a predetermined effect is executed is included. Therefore, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, when the rule of executing the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance occurs, the player can watch the progress of the game with anticipation of the execution of the variable game with a high probability of notifying that the result of the shift determination is the one to be shifted to the special game state, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state. In this way, the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state, so that the special game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting the type of mode image effect executed in the variable game or the execution of the predetermined specific effect in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will forget that the effect mode has been entered, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix B1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The plurality of production mode images include a specific character production mode image (for example, an image mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin) mainly composed of specific characters (for example, Marine, Urin, and Warin), and a non-specific character production mode image not mainly composed of the specific character (for example, an image not mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin),
The plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) include a specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) in which the specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) in which the non-specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341),
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), when a predetermined specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) among the plurality of specific effects is executed, the non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) is executed after a predetermined period after the predetermined specific effect (special ready-to-reach effect) is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). Amusement machine.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix B1, when the result of transition determination in the variation game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, and the predetermined specific performance out of the plurality of specific performances is executed, the non-specific character mode image performance is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the predetermined specific performance. That is, when a predetermined specific effect is executed in the variation game in which the specific character mode image effect is executed, the specific character mode image effect is not executed after the predetermined specific effect is executed. In this way, when a predetermined specific performance is executed in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, the specific character mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the predetermined specific performance, so that the player is suppressed from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the specific character performance mode image after the execution of the predetermined specific performance in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, even if the predetermined specific performance is, for example, a battle performance in which the character is life-or-death, the mode image performance of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

In addition, in the game machine according to appendix B1, when a predetermined specific performance is executed, the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games is shifted to a performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific character mode image effect from staying for a long period of time in the effect mode in which the effect can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, the player is restrained from having unpleasant feelings such as boredom and stress due to staying in a performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games for a long period of time, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix B2]
The plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) include a first specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state is a predetermined expectation level, and a second specific effect (super ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is lower than the predetermined expectation level,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the predetermined specific effect is the first specific effect.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the first specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) is an effect that can be executed after execution of the second specific effect (super ready-to-reach effect).

In the game machine pertaining to supplementary notes B2 and B3, when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, when the first specific performance with high transition expectation among the plurality of specific performances is executed, the non-specific character mode image performance is executed after a prescribed period of time after the first specific performance is executed. That is, when the first specific effect with a high transition expectation is executed, the specific character mode image effect is not executed after the execution of the first specific effect. In this way, when the first specific performance with a high transition expectation is executed, the specific character mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the first specific performance, so that the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the specific character performance mode image after the execution of the first specific performance, and the decrease in interest in the game is restrained.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendices B2 and B3, even if the first specific effect with a high degree of transition expectation is, for example, a battle effect in which the character is on the verge of life and death, the mode image effect of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

In addition, in the game machines according to supplementary notes B2 and B3, the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games is shifted to a performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games, triggered by the execution of the first specific performance with a high degree of transition expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific character mode image effect from staying for a long period of time in the effect mode in which the effect can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, the player is restrained from having unpleasant feelings such as boredom and stress due to staying in a performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games for a long period of time, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the predetermined specific effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) is a specific character effect (for example, marine special reach effect) corresponding to the specific character effect mode image (for example, an image mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin).

In the game machine pertaining to appendix B4, when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, and the specific character performance corresponding to the specific character mode image performance among the plurality of specific performances is executed, the non-specific character mode image performance is executed after a prescribed period of time after the specific character performance is executed. That is, when the specific character effect is executed, the specific character mode image effect is not executed after the specific character effect is executed. Thus, when the specific character performance is executed, the specific character mode image performance is not executed after the specific character performance is executed, so that the player is prevented from feeling unpleasant feelings such as disgust due to the execution of the specific character performance mode image after the specific character performance is executed, and the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix B4, even if the specific character performance centered on the specific character is, for example, a life-and-death battle performance of the character, the mode image performance of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game), so that the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable in the flow of the series of performances from the end of the specific character performance to the next variable game, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the game machine according to supplementary note B4, when the specific character performance centered on the specific character is executed, the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games is shifted to the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific character mode image effect from staying for a long period of time in the effect mode in which the effect can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, the player is restrained from having unpleasant feelings such as boredom and stress due to staying in a performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games for a long period of time, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state. In this way, the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state, so that the special game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting that the specific character mode image effect is executed in the variable game or that the predetermined specific effect is executed in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player forgets that the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is shifted to the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix C1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The plurality of production mode images include a specific character production mode image (for example, an image mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin) mainly composed of specific characters (for example, Marine, Urin, and Warin), and a non-specific character production mode image not mainly composed of the specific character (for example, an image not mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin),
The plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) include a specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) in which the specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) in which the non-specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341),
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, the jackpot lottery result is lost), and a predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) among the plurality of specific effects is executed, the specific character mode image effect (for example, marine stage) after a predetermined period of time after the predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect, special reach effect) is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). A game machine characterized by comprising a means for executing a production, a Urin stage production, and a Warin stage production.

In the game machine according to appendix C1, when a predetermined specific performance is executed, a performance mode in which a non-specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games is shifted to a performance mode in which a specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the non-specific character mode image effect from staying for a long time in the effect mode that can be executed over a plurality of variable games. As a result, the player is prevented from having unpleasant emotions such as boredom and stress due to a long stay in the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance can be executed over a plurality of variable games, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix C2]
The specific characters (e.g. Marine, Urin, Warin) include a first specific character (e.g. Marine) and a second specific character (e.g. Urin, Warin) different from the first specific character,
The specific character effect mode image includes a first specific character effect mode image mainly composed of the first specific character (e.g. Marin) and a second specific character effect mode image mainly composed of the second specific character (e.g. Urin, Warin),
The specific character mode image effects include a first specific character mode image effect (e.g. marine stage effect) in which the first specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a second specific character mode image effect (e.g. Urin character stage effect, Warin character stage effect) in which the second specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341),
The plurality of specific effects include a specific character effect corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image,
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, the big hit lottery result is lost), and the specific character specific effect (for example, marine super reach effect, marine special reach effect) is executed, the second specific character mode image effect (for example, Urin character stage effect, warin character stage effect) is executed after a predetermined period of time after the specific character effect is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized in that

In the game machine according to appendix C2, when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the non-specific character mode image effect is executed is a predetermined result, when the specific character effect corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image is executed, the second specific character effect mode image effect for the second specific character different from the first specific character is executed after a predetermined period of time after the specific character effect is executed. That is, when the specific character effect corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image is executed, the first specific character mode image effect is not executed after the specific character effect is executed. In this way, when the specific character performance corresponding to the first specific character performance mode image is executed, the first specific character mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the specific character performance, so that the player is prevented from having unpleasant emotions such as disgust due to the execution of the first specific character performance mode image after the execution of the specific character performance, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix C2, even if the specific character effect corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image is, for example, a battle effect in which the character is life or death, the mode image effect of the defeated (dead) first specific character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

[Appendix C3]
The plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) include a first specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state is a predetermined expectation level, and a second specific effect (super ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is lower than the predetermined expectation level,
The gaming machine according to appendix C1 or appendix C2, wherein the predetermined specific effect is the first specific effect.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to appendix C3, wherein the first specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) is an effect that can be executed after execution of the second specific effect (super ready-to-win effect).

In the game machine pertaining to appendices C3 and C4, when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image attraction is executed is a predetermined result, when the first specific attraction with high transition expectation among the plurality of specific attraction is executed, the non-specific character mode image attraction is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the first specific attraction. That is, when the first specific effect with a high transition expectation is executed, the specific character mode image effect is not executed after the execution of the first specific effect. In this way, when the first specific performance with a high degree of transition expectation is executed, the specific character mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the first specific performance, so that the player is prevented from having unpleasant feelings such as disgust caused by the execution of the specific character performance mode image after the execution of the first specific performance, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendices C3 and C4, even if the first specific effect with a high degree of transition expectation is, for example, a battle effect in which the character hangs on the line between life and death, the mode image effect of the defeated (dead) specific character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C4, wherein the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state. In this way, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state, so that the special game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting that the non-specific character mode image performance is executed in the variable game or that the predetermined specific performance is executed in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player forgets that the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed is shifted to the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix D1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The plurality of production mode images include a specific character production mode image (for example, an image mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin) mainly composed of specific characters (for example, Marine, Urin, and Warin), and a non-specific character production mode image not mainly composed of the specific character (for example, an image not mainly composed of Marine, Urin, and Warin),
The plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) include a specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) in which the specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) in which the non-specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341),
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), when a predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect) out of the plurality of specific effects is executed, the specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) is executed after a predetermined period after the predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect) is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). game machine.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix D1, when a predetermined specific effect is executed when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image effect is executed is a predetermined result, the specific character mode image effect is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the predetermined specific effect. That is, when the predetermined specific performance is executed when the result of transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, the game machine does not shift to the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed, but shifts (stays) to the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed. As a result, since the specific character mode image effect is continuously executed in a plurality of variable games, the boredom in progress of the variable game which tends to become boring can be reduced by the specific character mode image effect.

[Appendix D2]
The specific characters (e.g. Marine, Urin, Warin) include a first specific character (e.g. Marine) and a second specific character (e.g. Urin, Warin) different from the first specific character,
The specific character effect mode image includes a first specific character effect mode image mainly composed of the first specific character (e.g. Marin) and a second specific character effect mode image mainly composed of the second specific character (e.g. Urin, Warin),
The specific character mode image effects include a first specific character mode image effect (e.g. marine stage effect) in which the first specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341), and a second specific character mode image effect (e.g. Urin character stage effect, Warin character stage effect) in which the second specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341),
The plurality of specific effects include a specific character effect corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image,
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the specific character mode image effect (character stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost) and the specific character effect (for example, marine super reach effect, marine special reach effect) is executed, the first specific character mode image effect (for example, Urin character stage effect, warin character stage effect) is executed after a predetermined period of time after the specific character effect is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). The gaming machine according to appendix D1, characterized by:

In the game machine according to appendix D2, when the specific character performance corresponding to the first specific character performance mode image is executed when the transition determination result in the variable game in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, the first specific character mode image performance is executed after a predetermined period of time when the specific character performance corresponding to the first specific character performance mode image is executed. That is, when the specific character performance is executed in the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, the specific character performance is shifted (stayed) to the performance mode of the first specific character who is the subject of the specific character performance after a predetermined period of execution of the specific character performance. That is, the character in the specific character effect and the character in the subsequent effect mode are the same (associated). As a result, since the mode image performance of the character in the specific character performance is continuously executed in a plurality of variable games, boredom in the progress of the variable game which tends to become boring can be reduced by the specific character mode image performance.

[Appendix D3]
The specific character production (for example, marine super ready-to-reach production, marine special ready-to-reach production) includes a first specific character production (for example, marine special ready-to-reach production) in which the degree of transition expectation that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state is a predetermined expectation level, and a second specific character production (for example, marine super ready-to-reach production) in which the degree of transition expectation is lower than the predetermined expectation level,
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the predetermined specific effect is the second specific character effect.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the first specific character effect (for example, marine special ready-to-reach effect) is an effect that can be executed after the second specific character effect is executed.

In the game machine according to appendix D3 and appendix D4, the predetermined specific performance is a second specific character performance whose degree of transition expectation is lower than that of the first specific character performance and which can be executed before the first specific character performance. Here, the ready-to-reach production is often developed and executed in the order of normal production → super ready-to-reach production → special ready-to-reach production, and while the special ready-to-reach production is often set as a battle production, the super ready-to-win production is rarely set as a battle production. In addition, since the second specific character effect is a effect with a low transition expectation that can be executed before the first specific character effect, it is difficult to set as a battle effect. Therefore, in the second specified character performance, even if the second specified character performance notifies that the second specified character performance does not shift to the special game state, the player hardly has an unpleasant feeling such as disgust for the character of the second specified character performance. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the performance in the variable game, and the deterioration of the interest in the game is restrained.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state. In this way, the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state, so that the special game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting that the specific character mode image effect is executed in the variable game or that the predetermined specific effect is executed in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting that the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed is shifted to the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix E1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The plurality of production mode images include a first specific character production mode image (for example, an image mainly consisting of Marine) mainly composed of a first specific character among the plurality of specific characters (for example, Marine, Urin, and Warin), a second specific character production mode image (for example, an image mainly consisting of Urin and Warin) different from the first specific character out of the plurality of specific characters (for example, an image mainly consisting of Urin and Warin), and a non-specific character production mode image not mainly composed of the specific characters (for example, Marine and Urin). Images that are not based on Lin and Warin) and,
The plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) include: a first specific character mode image effect (e.g. marine stage effect) in which the first specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern on the image display means (341); a second specific character mode image effect (e.g. Urin stage effect, warin stage effect) in which the second specific character effect mode image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern in the image display means (341); (341) includes a non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern,
The plurality of specific effects include a specific character effect (for example, Marine Super Reach effect) corresponding to the first specific character effect mode image (for example, an image mainly of Marine),
The effect executing means (51)
When the result of the transition determination in the variable game in which the non-specific character mode image effect (normal stage effect) is executed is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost) and the specific character effect (for example, marine super reach effect) is performed, the first specific character effect mode image effect (for example, marine stage effect) is executed after a predetermined period of time after the specific character effect (for example, marine super reach effect) is executed (for example, at the start of the variable game executed next to the variable game). game machine.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix E1, when the specific character performance corresponding to the first specific character performance mode image is executed when the transition determination result in the variable game in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed is a predetermined result, the first specific character mode image performance is executed after a predetermined period of time after the specific character performance corresponding to the first specific character performance mode image is executed. That is, when the specific character performance is executed in the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed, the performance mode is shifted to the performance mode of the first specific character, which is the subject of the specific character performance, after a predetermined period of execution of the specific character performance. That is, when the specific character effect is executed, the effect mode in which the non-specific character mode image effect is executed is shifted to the effect mode in which the first specific character mode image effect is executed. As a result, the player can grasp in advance that the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed is shifted to the performance mode in which the first specific character mode image performance is executed, so that the player can enjoy the variation game while looking forward to the shift to the performance mode in which the first specific character mode image performance is executed mainly by the first specific character. Further, by shifting from a performance mode in which a non-specific character mode image performance is executed to a performance mode in which a first specific character mode image performance is executed with the execution of the specific character performance as a trigger, staying in the same performance mode for a long period of time is prevented, so that boredom in the progress of the variable game which tends to be boring can be reduced.

[Appendix E2]
The plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) include a first specific character effect (e.g., marine special ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state is a predetermined expectation level, and a second specific character effect (e.g., marine super ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of transition expectation is lower than the predetermined expectation level,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the specific character effect is the second specific character effect.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the first specific character effect (for example, marine special ready-to-reach effect) is an effect that can be executed after the second specific character effect is executed.

In the game machine pertaining to appendices E2 and E3, the predetermined specific performance is a second specific character performance that has a transition expectation level lower than that of the first specific character performance and that can be executed before the first specific character performance. Here, the ready-to-reach production is often developed and executed in the order of normal production → super ready-to-reach production → special ready-to-reach production, and while the special ready-to-reach production is often set as a battle production, the super ready-to-win production is rarely set as a battle production. In addition, since the second specific character effect is a effect with a low transition expectation that can be executed before the first specific character effect, it is difficult to set as a battle effect. Therefore, in the second specified character performance, even if the second specified character performance notifies that the second specified character performance does not shift to the special game state, the player hardly has an unpleasant feeling such as disgust for the character of the second specified character performance. As a result, the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the performance in the variable game, and the deterioration of the interest in the game is restrained.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the predetermined determination result is a determination result that does not shift to the special game state. In this way, the predetermined determination result is a determination result not to shift to the special game state, so that the special game is not executed after the end of the variation game in which the predetermined determination result is notified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player forgetting that the specific character mode image effect is executed in the variable game or that the predetermined specific effect is executed in the variable game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player forgets that the performance mode in which the non-specific character mode image performance is executed is shifted to the performance mode in which the specific character mode image performance is executed, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Appendix F1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the variable game;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The effect executing means (51)
When a predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) out of the plurality of specific effects is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big win lottery result is lost), the right to execute the variable game reserved by the holding means (41) includes a specific variable game (for example, a variable game for notifying that the lottery result is a big win, a variable game for which the change display time is longer than a predetermined time, and a variation in which a super ready-to-win effect or a special ready-to-win effect is executed. means for executing the predetermined specific effect (for example, marine special reach effect) in the specific variable game when the right to execute the game) is included;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the game machine pertaining to appendix F1, when the result of transition determination for the variable game in which the predetermined specific performance is executed is the predetermined result and the specific variable game is suspended, the predetermined specific performance is executed in the specific variable game. That is, in the specific variation game, the same effect as the predetermined specific effect executed in the variation game that notifies the predetermined result is executed. Thus, the player is provided with an opportunity to obtain a result other than the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is a big hit) by the predetermined specific performance in which the player is disappointed by notifying the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is lost). That is, the player is given an opportunity to take revenge on a predetermined specific effect (character). In this way, by providing an opportunity to take revenge on a predetermined specific effect (character), the interest in the game is enhanced.

[Appendix F2]
The plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) include a first specific effect (special ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state is a predetermined expectation level, and a second specific effect (super ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is lower than the predetermined expectation level,
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the predetermined specific effect is the first specific effect.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine according to appendix F2, wherein the first specific character effect (for example, special ready-to-win effect) is an effect that can be executed after the second specific character effect (for example, super ready-to-reach effect) is executed.

In the game machines according to supplementary notes F2 and F3, when the result of transition determination for a variable game in which a first specified performance with a high degree of transition expectation is executed is a predetermined result and there is a suspension of the specified variable game, the first specified performance is executed in the specified variable game. That is, in the specific variable game, the same effect as the first specific effect with high transition expectation executed in the variable game informing the predetermined result is executed. As a result, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a result other than the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is a big hit) by the specific performance with a high degree of expectation for transition, which is disappointing by notifying the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is lost) in advance. That is, the player is given an opportunity to take revenge on a predetermined specific effect (character). In this way, the interest in the game is improved by giving the opportunity to take revenge on the highly anticipated first specific effect (character).

[Appendix F4]
The game machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined specific effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) is a specific character effect (for example, marine special reach effect) corresponding to the specific character mode image effect (character stage effect).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, when the result of transition determination for the variable game in which the specific character performance is executed is a predetermined result and there is suspension of the specific variable game, the specific character performance is executed in the specific variable game. That is, in the specific variable game, the same effect as the specific character effect executed in the variable game that notifies the predetermined result is executed. Thus, the player is provided with an opportunity to obtain a result other than the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is a big hit) by the performance of the specific character that disappoints him by informing him of the predetermined result (for example, the lottery result is lost). That is, the player is provided with an opportunity to take revenge on the specific character effect (character). In this way, by giving the opportunity to take revenge on the specific character effect (character), the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, characterized in that said effect executing means (51) executes said predetermined specific effect in said specific variable game by omitting part of said game effect other than said predetermined specific effect in said specific variable game when the time for executing said predetermined specific effect in said specific variable game is insufficient.

In the game machine according to appendix F5, when the time for executing the predetermined specific performance in the specific variable game is insufficient, the predetermined specific performance is executed by omitting part of the game performance other than the predetermined specific performance in the specific variable game. By omitting a part of the game performances other than the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game and executing the prescribed specific performance in this way, it is possible to execute the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game even when the time for executing the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game is insufficient.

[Appendix F6]
The game machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, wherein the effect execution means (51) executes the predetermined specific effect from the middle to the last part in the specific variable game when the time for executing the predetermined specific effect in the specific variable game is insufficient.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, when the time for executing the predetermined specific effect in the specific variable game is insufficient, the predetermined specific effect is executed from the middle to the last part in the specific variable game. Thus, when the time for executing the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game is insufficient, the prescribed specific performance is executed from the middle to the last part in the specific variation game, so that the prescribed specific performance can be executed in the specific variation game even when the time for executing the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game is insufficient.

[Appendix F7]
The game machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, characterized in that said effect executing means (51) starts said predetermined specific effect from a variable game executed before said specific variable game when the time for executing said predetermined specific effect in said specific variable game is insufficient.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, when the time for executing the predetermined specific effect in the specific variable game is insufficient, the predetermined specific effect is started from the variable game executed before the specific variable game. Thus, when the time for executing the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game is insufficient, the prescribed specific performance is started from the variable game executed before the specific variation game, so that the prescribed specific performance can be executed in the specific variation game even when the time for executing the prescribed specific performance in the specific variation game is insufficient.

[Appendix G1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The effect executing means (51)
When a predetermined specific effect (for example, a specific character super ready-to-win effect, a specific character special reach effect) is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image effects (stage effect) is changed after a predetermined period of time after the predetermined specific effect (for example, the marine special reach effect) is executed (for example, the variable game to be executed next to the variable game). at the start of the technique), means for causing the image display means (341) to execute,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period from the start of the next variation game to be executed next to the variation game to the end of the specific variation game.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix G1, when the result of transition determination to the variable game in which the predetermined specific performance of the plurality of specific performances is executed is a predetermined result, a mode image performance different from the mode image performance executed in the variable game among the plurality of mode image performances is executed after a predetermined period of execution of the predetermined specific performance. That is, when the predetermined specific effect is executed, the mode image effect executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the predetermined specific effect. In this way, when the prescribed specific performance is executed, the mode image performance executed in the variation game is not executed after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, so that the player is restrained from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the mode image performance executed in the variation game after the execution of the prescribed specific performance, and the decline in interest in the game is restrained.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, even if the predetermined specific performance is, for example, a battle performance in which the character is life-and-death, the mode image performance of the defeated (deceased) character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the predetermined period is set to a period from the start of the next variation game to be executed next to the variation game to the end of the specific variation game. In this way, when the predetermined period is set to the period from the start of the next variation game to be executed next to the variation game to the end of the specific variation game, the player is disappointed because the predetermined specific effect is to inform that the result of the transition determination for the variation game is not to shift to the special game state. Since it is possible to watch the progress of the game with pleasure that the is executed, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in the game machine according to the appendix G1, by executing a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game in the variable game after the relevant variable game, it can be grasped that a specific variable game is executed in the variable game in which the relevant mode image effect is executed or in the subsequent variable game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific variable game will be executed within a short period of time from the end of the variable game in which the player is discouraged because the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of the transition determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, so that the discouraged situation improves at an early stage, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period from the start of the next variation game to the end of the next variation game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the predetermined period is set to the period from the start of the next variation game to the end of the next variation game. By setting the predetermined period to the period from the start of the next variation game to the end of the next variation game, in a situation where the player is discouraged because the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of the transition determination for the variation game does not shift to the special game state, the player can enjoy watching the progress of the game in the next variation game of the variation game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine pertaining to appendix G2, by executing a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the relevant variable game in the variable game after the relevant variable game, it can be grasped that a specific variable game is executed in the variable game in which the relevant mode image effect is executed or in the subsequent variable game. Therefore, the player can understand that the specific variable game will be executed within a short period of time from the end of the variable game in which the player is discouraged because the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of the shift determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, and the discouraged situation improves at an early stage, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G2, wherein the predetermined period includes at least a period from the start of variation of the plurality of decorative symbols in the next variable game to the stop display of one of the plurality of decorative symbols.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, the predetermined period includes at least a period from the start of variation of the plurality of decoration symbols in the next variation game to the stop display of one of the plurality of decoration symbols. That is, the player can grasp that the specific variable game is executed immediately after the variable game next to the variable game in which the player is disappointed because the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of the shift determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, and the discouraged situation improves at an early stage, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4]
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the variable game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means (41) at the start of the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) is executed when the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means at the start of the variable game in which a predetermined specific performance is executed when the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result. In this way, the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means at the start of the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect is executed when the result of the transition determination is the predetermined result, so that in the variable game executed after the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect is executed, the mode image effect different from the mode image effect in the variable game in the next variable game is completed until all the reserved variable games are completed. Since it is possible to watch the progress of the game with pleasure that the is executed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to appendix G4, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game that informs that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, the specific variable game is a variable game that informs that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. In this way, it is a variable gaming that reports that the result of the migration judgment is the transition to a special gaming state, so that the transition judgment result is shifted to a special gaming state until all the on -owned variable gaming executed after the specified specific production is executed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the floating gaming technique is included in the hold, improving the excitement of the game.

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to appendix G4 or appendix G5, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is a predetermined time or longer.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G6, the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Here, in the gaming machine, there is a tendency that the longer the variation display time of the decorative symbols, the higher the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be the transition to the special game state. Therefore, since the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decoration pattern is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, in the variable game executed after the variable game in which the predetermined specific performance is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the variable game with high expectation that the result of transition determination will be shifted to the special game state is included in the reserved variable game until the end of all the reserved variable games, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G7]
The plurality of specific effects include a first specific effect (for example, super reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is a predetermined degree of expectation, and a second specific effect (for example, special reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is higher than the predetermined degree of expectation,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G4 to G6, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the second specific effect (for example, special reach effect) is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G7, the specific variable game is a variable game in which a second specific effect is executed in which the degree of transition expectation is higher than the predetermined degree of expectation. Thus, since the specific variable game is the variable game in which the second specific performance whose transition expectation degree is higher than the predetermined expectation degree is executed, in the variable game executed after the predetermined specific performance is executed, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the variable game with the high transition expectation degree will be included in the suspension until all the suspended variable games are finished, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G8]
The game machine according to any one of appendices G4 to G7, characterized in that the effect execution means (51) comprises means for executing an effect (stage transition notice effect, change effect) clearly indicating or suggesting that the different mode image effect will be executed before executing a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix G8, before executing a mode image performance different from the mode image performance executed in the variable game, a performance explicitly or suggesting that a different mode image performance is executed is executed. That is, when a different mode image performance is executed after a prescribed period of execution of a prescribed specific performance, a performance for notifying that the different mode image performance will be executed is executed before the different mode image performance is executed. In this way, when a different mode image effect is executed after a predetermined period of time after a predetermined specific effect is executed, the effect for notifying that the different mode image effect will be executed is executed before the different mode image effect is executed, so that the player can grasp in advance that the different mode image effect will be executed. Increases interest in techniques.

[Appendix G9]
The game machine according to appendix G8, wherein the performance (stage transition notice performance, change performance) explicitly or suggesting that the different mode image performance is executed is executed in a variable game in which the predetermined specific performance (super ready-to-win performance, special ready-to-win performance) is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G9, an effect explicitly or suggesting that a different mode image effect is to be executed is executed in a variable game in which a predetermined specific effect is executed. In this way, a performance explicitly or suggesting that a different mode image performance is executed is executed in a variable game in which a predetermined specific performance is executed, so that a player can grasp that a specific variable game is included in a variable game to be held which is executed after a variable game in which a predetermined specific performance is executed, by the time the variable game is finished. Therefore, even if the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of transition determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, i.e., even if the player would normally be disappointed in the variable game, the situation improves at once by executing the performance that indicates or suggests that the different mode image performance is executed, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G10]
The game machine according to appendix G8, characterized in that the performance explicitly or suggesting that the different mode image performance is to be executed (stage transition notice performance, change performance) is executed in a set period from the start of the next variable game to be started next to the variable game to the end of the variable game to be executed before the variable game in which the different mode image performance is to be executed.

In the game machine pertaining to appendix G10, the performance specifying or suggesting that a different mode image performance is to be executed is executed in a set period from the start of the next variation game to be started next to the relevant variation game to the end of the variation game to be executed before the variation game in which the different mode image performance is to be executed. In this way, an effect that expresses or suggests that a different mode image effect is to be executed is executed in a period set from the start of the next variable game that starts next to the variable game to the end of the variable game that is executed before the variable game in which the different mode image effect is executed. By executing a performance explicitly or suggesting that a mode image performance is executed, it is possible to grasp that a specific variable game is executed in a variable game in which a different mode image performance is executed or in subsequent variable games. Therefore, the player can understand that the specific variable game will be executed within a short period of time from the end of the variable game in which the player is discouraged because the predetermined specific performance notifies that the result of the shift determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, and the discouraged situation improves at an early stage, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G11]
The gaming machine according to appendix G10, wherein the effect that expresses or suggests that the different mode image effect is to be executed is continuously executed in a plurality of variable games.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G11, an effect explicitly or suggesting that different mode image effects are to be executed is continuously executed in a plurality of variable games. In this way, performances specifying or suggesting that different mode image presentations are executed are successively carried out in a plurality of variation games, so that a player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting which variation game the different mode image presentations will be carried out each time the performances that specify or suggest that different mode image presentations are carried out are carried out, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
a main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a variable game for performing transition determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition determination;
Effect executing means (51) for causing an image display means (341) to execute a game effect (variable game effect) in the variable game;
with
The game effects include a decorative pattern variation effect that notifies the result of the transition determination by variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols, a plurality of mode image effects (stage effects) in which the effect mode image selected from a plurality of effect mode images can be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbol in the image display means (341) over a plurality of times of the variable game, and a plurality of specific effects (super ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, special reach production) and,
The effect executing means (51)
When a predetermined specific effect (for example, a specific character super ready-to-win effect, a specific character special reach effect) is executed in the variable game in which the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit lottery result is lost), a mode image effect different from the mode image effect executed in the variable game out of the plurality of mode image effects (stage effect) is changed after a predetermined period of time after the predetermined specific effect (for example, the marine special reach effect) is executed (for example, the variable game to be executed next to the variable game). at the start of the technique), means for causing the image display means (341) to execute,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period from the start of the variation game to the end of the variation game.

In the gaming machine according to note H1, the second mode image effect is executed in a predetermined period after the first specific effect is executed when the result of the transition determination for the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is the predetermined result, and when the specific variable game is held, the first specific effect is executed in the predetermined period after the first specific effect is executed in the case where the transition determination result for the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is the predetermined result. mode image effect is executed. That is, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, the first mode image performance is not executed after the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed except when the specific variable game is held. Thus, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed, the first mode image performance is not executed after the execution of the first specific performance except when the specific variable game is suspended, so that the player is prevented from having an unpleasant feeling such as disgust due to the execution of the first mode image performance after the execution of the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, even if the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is, for example, a battle effect in which the character is on the verge of life and death, the first mode image effect of the defeated (deceased) character is not immediately executed (for example, in the next variable game).

On the other hand, in the gaming machine pertaining to appendix H1, when the specific variable game is suspended, the first mode image effect is executed in a predetermined period after the execution of the first specific effect when the result of transition determination to the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is a predetermined result. In this way, when the first specific performance corresponding to the first mode image is executed when the specific variable game is suspended, the first mode image performance is exceptionally executed after the execution of the first specific performance. In other words, when the law is violated by executing the first mode image performance after the execution of the first specific performance, the variable game for suspension executed after the variation game in which the first specific performance is executed includes the specific variation game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific variable game is included in the suspended variable game to be executed after the variable game to be executed by the first specific performance when the rule of executing the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance. Thus, when the first mode image performance is executed after the execution of the first specific performance, the player can watch the progress of the game with pleasure that the specific variation game is executed after the variation game in which the first specific performance is executed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when there is a suspension of the specific variable game, a predetermined period during which the first mode image effect is executed after execution of the first specific effect when the result of transition determination to the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is a predetermined result is set to a period from the start of the variable game to the end of the variable game. Thus, the predetermined period is set to the period from the start of the variable game to the end of the variable game, so that the player can grasp that the variable game on hold executed after the variable game in which the first specific performance is executed includes the specific variable game by the time the variable game is ended. Therefore, even if the first specific performance notifies that the result of the transition determination for the variable game does not shift to the special game state, i.e., even if the player would normally be disappointed in the variable game, execution of the first mode image performance gives the player a game property in which the situation improves at once, and thus the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period from the end of the first specific effect (for example, marine special ready-to-win effect) to the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, when the specific variable game is suspended, the predetermined period during which the first mode image effect is executed after the execution of the first specific effect when the result of the shift determination to the variable game in which the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed is a predetermined result is set to the period from the end of the first specific effect until the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. Here, there is a game machine in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for a certain period of time in a pattern display part to indicate that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost, and then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to clarify (determine) that the lottery result is lost. Therefore, when the predetermined period is set to the period from the end of the first specific performance to the stop display of the decoration pattern, it is advantageous to use the period from the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern to the stop display.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1 or appendix H2, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game that notifies that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H3, the specific variable game is a variable game that notifies that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. In this way, since the specific variable game is a variable game that informs that the result of the transition determination is to be shifted to the special game state, when the first specific effect corresponding to the first mode image is executed, and when the law is broken in which the first mode image effect is executed after the execution of the first specific effect, the player can shift the result of the transition determination to the special game state during the variable game for suspension executed after the variable game in which the first specific effect is executed. It can be understood that a variable game that informs that it is a thing is included. As a result, when the law of the execution of the first mode image performance is broken after the execution of the first specific performance, the player can watch the progress of the game with anticipation of the execution of the variable game informing that the result of the shift determination is to be shifted to the special game state, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the variable game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H3, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means (41) at the start of the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect (super ready-to-win effect, special ready-to-win effect) is executed when the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H4, the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means at the start of the variable game in which a predetermined specific performance is executed when the result of the transition determination is a predetermined result. In this way, the specific variable game is a variable game included in the right to execute the variable game reserved by the reserve means at the start of the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect is executed when the result of the transition determination is the predetermined result, so that in the variable game executed after the variable game in which the predetermined specific effect is executed, the mode image effect different from the mode image effect in the variable game in the next variable game is completed until all the reserved variable games are completed. Since it is possible to watch the progress of the game with pleasure that the is executed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game that informs that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5, the specific variable game is a variable game that notifies that the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. In this way, it is a variable gaming that reports that the result of the migration judgment is the transition to a special gaming state, so that the transition judgment result is shifted to a special gaming state until all the on -owned variable gaming executed after the specified specific production is executed. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the floating gaming technique is included in the hold, improving the excitement of the game.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to appendix H4 or appendix H5, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is a predetermined time or longer.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decorative symbols is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Here, in the gaming machine, there is a tendency that the longer the variation display time of the decorative symbols, the higher the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination will be the transition to the special game state. Therefore, since the specific variable game is a variable game in which the variable display time of the decoration pattern is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, in the variable game executed after the variable game in which the predetermined specific performance is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the variable game with high expectation that the result of transition determination will be shifted to the special game state is included in the reserved variable game until the end of all the reserved variable games, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H7]
The plurality of specific effects include a first specific effect (for example, super reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is a predetermined degree of expectation, and a second specific effect (for example, special reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for transition is higher than the predetermined degree of expectation,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H4 to H6, wherein the specific variable game is a variable game in which the second specific effect (for example, special reach effect) is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, the specific variable game is a variable game in which a second specific effect is executed in which the degree of transition expectation is higher than the predetermined degree of expectation. In this way, the specific variable game is a variable game in which a second specific effect with a transition expectation level higher than a predetermined expectation level is executed,
In a variable game executed after a variable game in which a predetermined specific performance is executed, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that a variable game with a high shift expectation degree will be included in the suspended until all the suspended variable games are finished, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

10: Gaming Machine 31: Game Board 316: Variable Winning Port 341: Symbol Display Part 35: Lamp Display Part 351: First Individual Lamp Part 352: Second Individual Lamp Part 353: Third Individual Lamp Part 354: Fourth Individual Lamp Part 355: Fifth Individual Lamp Part 356: Sixth Individual Lamp Part 37: Cloon Device 373: Special Out Ball Mouth 38: Game Ball Retention Part 381: Retention Lane 383 : Stopper section 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in one of a plurality of transition determination states with different transition rates for transitioning to the special game state,
storage means for storing each numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
setting means for setting whether to perform the transition determination in the transition determination state using which of the numerical information;
display control means for displaying a display corresponding to one of the transition determination states set by the setting means in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display control means is
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
means for displaying a plurality of types of specific information displayed using numbers or characters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period of time from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing at least when a game ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is satisfied;
This game machine is
During the prescribed period, the prescribed information indicating the prescribed numerical information is not displayed in the prescribed area of the display means,
The display order of the plurality of types of specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means for the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means ,
an opening/closing motion game execution means for executing a predetermined opening/closing motion game to a special ball entry means for giving a specific profit when a game ball enters the game ball when opened;
A plurality of stages are set for each predetermined number of the number of game balls entering the specific area,
The display control means is
It is possible to display with a different number of displays for each stage in the plurality of stages,
When a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the opening/closing operation game, a display corresponding to a predetermined stage corresponding to the number of game balls entering the specific area among the plurality of stages is configured to be executed,
an effect display executing means for executing a specific effect display on the display means when the specific condition is established based on execution of a predetermined game by the player;
configured to display the plurality of types of the specific information in the predetermined area of the display means in accordance with a display order set when executing the specific effect display,
In a predetermined game state, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation of the player, the plurality of types of the specific information displayed during the past predetermined period are configured to be visible,
A gaming machine characterized in that a mode of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means and a mode of the specific information displayed on the display means are different.

Images